You are on page 1of 337

AUTOMATOR ( SUISSE ) SAGL

Via Ligornetto 1
CH – 6855 Stabio Date:
Tel.0041 91 647 15 80 - Fax. Manual of marking controller AC500
Feb 2016
0041 91 647 15 92

OPERATION MANUAL OF

Controller AC 500

Revision 14
FOREWORD

This document contains instructions and information for operating the AC


500 Controller. This document may be kept current with Change Notices
and Revisions.

Specific information for the marking equipment used with the AC 500
Controller is contained in Supplements to this manual

Automator Suisse reserves the right to change the information and specifications contained in this
document without prior notice. The reader should consult Automator Suisse to determine whether such
changes have been made.

In no event shall Automator Suisse be liable for any incidental, indirect, special, or consequential damages
whatsoever, including but not limited to lost profits, arising out of, or relating to this document or the
information it contains, even if Automator has been advised, has knowledge, or should have knowledge of
the possibility of such damages.

Automator expressly warrants the equipment it manufactures as set forth in the Standard Terms and
Conditions of Sale in any offer.

The information contained in this document is confidential and is proprietary to Automator.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 2 -
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TITLE PAG.

CHAPTER 1 – INTRODUCTION 7
1.1 Use of the manual 7
1.2 Overview of the marking system 7
1.3 Terminologies 9
1.4 Considerations 11
1.5 Marking surface 12
1.6 Pin 12
CHAPTER 2 – THE OPERATING SYSTEM 15
2.1 Using the controller 15
2.2 Starting the software 16
2.3 Set the status of the marking head (ONLINE/OFFLINE) 21
2.4 Loading a program 23
2.5 Parking the marking head 25
2.6 Prepositioning the marking head 26
2.7 Manual data entry 27
2.8 Text with query 30
2.9 Dry marking 32
2.10 Area check cycle 34
2.11 Marking a program 36
2.12 Marking time 37
2.13 Stop the execution of a marking cycle 37
2.14 Stop and re-start the execution of a marking cycle 38
2.15 Full Screen Preview 38
2.16 Move the marking head 39
2.17 Select the operating level 42
2.18 Displaying the controller version 45
2.19 Switch off the controller 46
CHAPTER 3 – CREATE A PROGRAM 49
3.1 Set the operating level 49
3.2 Basic considerations of the program and fields 49
3.3 Creating a pattern 53
3.4 Screen of editor 55
3.5 Setting program parameters 57
3.6 Define the anchor point of the program 57
3.7 Define the head parking position 59
3.8 Define the default parameters of the text field 60
3.9 Use custom fonts 62
3.14 Adding fields to a 63
3.11 Setting the configuration for the data to mark from CSV file 68
3.12 Define the background image of the preview of the program 72
3.13 Define the background grid of the preview of the program 73
3.14 Add fields to the program 74
3.14.1 Parameters of the text field 80
3.14.2 Parameters of the line field 85
3.14.3 Parameters of the arc field 86
3.14.4 Parameters of the text field on arc 89
3.14.5 Parameters of the datamatrix 93
3.14.6 Parameters of the pause field 100
3.14.7 Parameters of the Goto field 101
3.14.8 Parameters of the bitmap image field 103
3.14.9 Parameters of the comment field 105

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 3 -
3.14.10 Parameters of the DXF field 106
3.14.11 Parameters of the automation field 108
3.15 Flag commands 110
3.16 Interactive and positioning through jog environment 114
3.17 Modify the fields of the program from preview 115
3.18 Modify a program 116
3.18.1 Testing a program 116
3.18.2 Saving a program 116
3.18.3 Changing program parameters 117
3.18.4 Changing field parameters 117
3.18.5 Changing pattern fields 117
3.19 File management 117
3.20 Management of controller network 120
3.21 No repetitiveness check 123
CHAPTER 4 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 124
4.1 Accessing system parameters 124
4.2 Defining Omni serial numbering 125
4.3 Definition of the shift codes 130
4.4 Definition of the day codes 132
4.5 Definition of the month codes 134
4.6 Definition of the year codes 136
4.7 Definition of a text query 137
4.8 General parameters 138
4.9 Setting the axes parameters 148
4.10 Setting the machine maintenance 152
4.11 Setting the heads store 154
4.12 Setting of the system language 160
4.13 Setting of software graphics 164
4.14 Setting the serial port 165
4.15 USB Barcode configuration 169
4.16 Network settings configuration 172
4.17 Use of database machines 177
4.18 Date and time setting 183
4.19 Setting of the windows header 183
4.20 Settings of modbus axes parameters 186
4.21 AC500 Store 191
4.22 Configuration fieldbus board 201
4.23 Management programs loading from the network 204
4.24 Alarm history display 209
4.25 System statistics display 211
4.26 Backup of the data system 216
4.27 System update 220
4.28 Display of free memory 222
4.29 USB and external mouse management using USB key 224
4.30 Markings history display 225
4.31 Virtual keyboards management 231
4.32 Board Versions 232
4.33 Configuration of the printer settings 236
CHAPTER 5 – TEST AND SYSTEM CALIBRATION 240
5.1 System test 240
5.1.1 Test of the digital inputs 242
5.1.2 Test of the digital outputs 242
5.1.3 Test of the frequency outputs 243
5.1.4 Test of the working area 242
5.2 Axes calibration 247
CHAPTER 6 – CONNECTIONS AND COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE CONTROLLER 250
6.1 Remote communications 250
6.2 I/O signals 251
6.3 Remote program selection 255
6.4 Check signal TTL Input 255

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 4 -
6.5 Host Communications 257
6.6 RS-232 Interface 258
6.7 RS-485 Interface 259
6.8 Extended protocol 259
6.9 Programmable protocol 266
6.10 Programmable protocol for USB Barcode 269
6.11 Remote check of the controller 275
APPENDIX A –ASCII characters 277
APPENDIX B – Configuration and use of Theta axis (rotational) 278
B.1 Enable and configure the Theta axis 278
B.2 Test of Theta axis 280
B.3 Theta axis calibration 282
B.4 Modify programs with Theta axis 284
B.5 Manual environment with Theta axis 287
B.6 Work environment with Theta axis 289
APPENDIX C – Table of remote selection of the programs 292
APPENDIX D –Table of alarms description 295
APPENDIX E – Touch screen calibration procedure 297
APPENDIX F – Object dictionary modbus slave function 298
APPENDIX G – Fieldbus module Ethernet/IP 300
APPENDIX H – Fieldbus profibus module 322

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 5 -
REVISIONS

Number and date

Revision 14 dated February 2016

Revision of the manual and its parts

Parts manual Review

Indication 14
0 8.0
1 13.0
2 13.0
3 14.0
4 14.0
5 7.0
6 13.0
Chapter AppA 3.0
AppB 8.0
AppC 3.0
AppD 14.0
AppE 6.0
AppF 8.0
AppG 13.0
AppH 13.0
AppI 13.0
Date January 16
Signature UT / rb

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 6 -
CHAPTER 1
Introduction

1.1 Use of the manual

This manual documents the use of the AC 500 Controller to operate different marking
systems. The information in this manual describes the use of the marking system
software to operate the marker and to design, print, and maintain a library of patterns.

The AC 500 Controller is capable of operating many kinds (technologies) of marking


heads. While most software features are universally employed in the various
systems, some features are unique to specific markers. Accordingly, some
features documented in this manual may not apply to your specific system.
Where variation do exist, they will be clearly identified within the text to inform you of the
differences.

This manual is divided into the following sections:

 Section 1 – Introduction - provides an overview of marking system terminology and


concepts. You should become familiar with this information before operating the
marker.
 Section 2 – System operation - provides an overview of marking system
terminology and instructions on how to operate

1.2 Overview of the marking system

The marking system permanently prints messages into a variety of materials such as steel,
aluminium, and plastic. The shape, size, and location of the marked message are
programmed by the designer using the system software.

ADP MARKING SYSTEM AT POINTS DENSITY

The points system uses a piston moved pneumatically marking a message


permanently engraving the surface with a sequence of points whose density can be
programmed. The software provides for the definition of the characteristics of the
message, including the marking coordinates within the working area

VIBRATING MARKING SYSTEM

Marking is accomplished by pressing the pin head against the surface being
marked. While the software moves the pin cartridge through the X/Y axes, the tip
of the extended pin displaces the material being marked, thereby forming
continuous-line characters.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 7 -
ADP – SCRIBE MARKING SYSTEM

The marking is carried out by maintaining the thrust piston in pressure (sintered
diamond pin) on the surface of the workpiece during the movement along the axes.
The marking track is said "scribe".

As for the software, the use of this head will be 100% comparable with the features
available with the vibrating head. In order to control a scriber head it is necessary
to have an AC500 controller rev. C.

ALEA - A LASER MARKING SYSTEM


The marking is done by Yag laser beam, which wavelength is 1064nm. The
software moves the cartridge, which emits the beam, along the XY coordinates set.

A typical marking system includes the following components, supplied by Automator


Suisse:

• Marking head (including head cable, pin cartridge, and marking pin)
• Filter/regulator unit and air lines (pneumatic systems only)
• AC 500 Controller (including power supply)
• AC 500 Manual

Marking Head. The marking head is constituted by a mechanism guides that rapidly
positions the pin/laser beam according with the defined coordinates. The ADP marking
head also includes the components to drive the pin back and forth.

Filter/Regulator for ADP. For pneumatic systems, the filter/regulator unit controls
air pressure to the marking head. For most pneumatic systems, the filter/regulator unit
includes a regulator with pressure gauges to control the drive and return air of the
head. The drive air pushes the pin out from the cartridge. The return into the
cartridge is made with a spring system. This unit is insufficient if pneumatic
supply of the customer does not ensure clean and dry air.

Controller. The controller runs the basic software and generates commands to move
the marking head. The controller contains a graphic 7” touch widescreen and provides
the user interface to the marking system, allowing the operator to select commands
and make choices displayed by the system software. The back panel of the controller
includes a Marker port for connection to the marking head, a Host port for connection
to RS-232 or RS-485 devices (with a server computer or bar code scanner), an I/O port
for connection to a logic controller (such as a PLC or relay-generated input/output
signals), and a TTL I/O port for connection with Automator options (remote station)
An Aux Axis port is also provided for systems that employ an optional, auxiliary axis
(such as Zeta or Theta)

System Software. The basic software is permanently installed in the controller. It


offers the user interface schemes. The software also provides a library for storing,
loading, and editing user-defined patterns.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 8 -
1.3 Terminologies

Patterns and Fields


The marking system uses patterns to print objects. Patterns are files stored in the
controller’s memory. These files (.prg extension) and can be imported/exported using an
USB key. Each pattern contains one or more fields. A field defines a single object and
how it will be marked. Where applicable, fields may define text strings, geometric objects,
Goto or Pause commands. Sequences of text can include alphanumeric characters,
symbols, and special commands called flag, which automatically enter data in the
sequence of text, such as serial numbers, times, and dates according to the user's own
table.

Marking Area
The marking area is the rectangular area where messages can be marked by the system. .
The area is defined by the movement of the marking head along its X- and Y-axes. The
size of the marking area is determined by the physical limitations of the marking head. If a
program will contain a field that goes out over the marking area, the system will highlight
a communication when trying to mark it, so as to be corrected.

Workpiece positioning
It’s important to understand the placement of the part to be marked relative to the
marking head. Patterns are designed to mark objects at precise locations within the
marking area. If the part is incorrectly positioned relative to the marking area, the
marking will not be as expected.
Field locations are defined by X- and Y-axis coordinates relative to the 0,0 point of the
area. Since the marking head uses this reference point to locate and print the objects,
and since all objects must reside within the marking area, the operator can understand
how much the proper alignment of the part within the area is critical to obtain a
satisfactory marking.

Calibration - Home Position


The X/Y Home calibration position is set at the moment of the production and cannot be
changed. The marking head moves to the calibration position whenever the machine is
placed online. This allows the system to reset and re-establish its position relative to the
marking area. Optionally, the system can be programmed to move immediately the head
to the calibration position immediately before or after marking.

Parking position
The parking position may be defined by the user. It is often defined to move the marking
pin out of the marking area so that to easily remove or secure the part being marked to
the to the basis support. A different parking position can be defined for each pattern.
The marking head will move to its parking position when the system finishes marking a
pattern or when a parking command is given by the operator.

Pre-positioning
The Pre-positioning command moves the pin over to the anchor point of the first field to
mark. The pre-positioning command may be used to set the marking head before the
marking process.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 9 -
Operating levels
The marking system may be operated in four modes: User, Supervisor, Distributor and
Manufacturer. The access to the Supervisor, Distributor or Manufacturer mode is limited
to the use of a protection password, to restrict the access to authorized personnel.

User It allows to upload and mark the patterns. See Section 2 for details on
operating the marking system.

Supervisor It Allows to perform all options available to the User and to create and
modify patterns.

Distributor It allows to perform all options available to the Supervisor, to


change the general system operating parameters and to check their
performance. See Sections 3, 4, and 5 for details on the Distributor
features.

Manufacturer It allows to perform all options available to the Distributor and to


change the general system axis and maintenance parameters
See Sections 3, 4, and 5 for details on the Manufacturer features

Sequence of Operation
Typically, the marking system is operated in the following sequence. Optionally, the
equipment may remain on from shift-to-shift so that unnecessary startup and shutdown is
avoided.
1. Start the system software.
2. Turn on / adjust the drive air pressure.
3. Place the head online.
4. Load the pattern to be marked
5. (optional) Park the marking head
6. Position and secure the part to be marked.
7. (optional) Pre-position the marking head
8. ( optional) Operate the marking in simulation
9. Mark the pattern .
10. Remove the marked part.
11. Repeat the marking on a new piece.

There is no operation to be followed to produce a particular marking. The quality of


marking depends on many factors such as
• ADP - the depth of marking, the surface and the type of pin
• ALEA - the setting of the frequency and the filling field

Usually, it is better to perform a marking test concretely on a sample to obtain the best
settings combination in response to the individual needs.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 10 -
1.4 Considerations

General Overview

ADP DOT/DOT DENSITY MARKING HEADS The marking force on a dot is


instantaneous and concentrated in a small area. This minimizes the impact total force
on the part being marked.

ADP VIBRATING MARKING HEADS A low drive air pressure and the use of a
minimal pin stroke will guarantee high quality markings.

ADP SCRIBE MARKING HEADS The adjustment of the pressure thrust of the
diamond pin should be set depending on the type of material of the workpiece to be
marked.

ALEA - LASER MARKING HEADS. Two are the parameters of the ALEA laser
marking : the voltage, with a value between 0 and 10; the filling, with more choices
that consequently influence the timing of marking

ADP - Pin stroke


The distance between the pin in rest position and the marking surface is known as pin
stroke.
DOT/DOT DENSITY MARKING HEADS. Pin stroke is the major factor in
determining the depth of the marking. The pin accelerates on its stroke, , achieving its
maximum speed at the time of the hit. Therefore, at the increasing of the pin stroke ,
the depth of the marking and dot diameter also increase.
The pin stroke also affect the speed of the marking; a longer pin strokes will require
more time to mark.

VIBRATING MARKING HEADS Varying the pin stroke, the marking depth can be
increased or decreased. As the pin stroke is increased, the depth of marking at the
initial point of impact will increase consequently.

ALEA – Fire of the cartridge


The fire is the distance between the output of the laser beam from the cartridge and the
surface to be marked. Its default value is 40mm with a tolerance of ± 0.5.

ADP - Drive Air Pressure

DOT/DOT DENSITY MARKING HEADS. For pneumatic systems, varying the drive
pressure and, where applicable, the return air pressure, the marking depth and the
dot diameter can be increased or decreased. Obviously, the depth increases as drive
air pressure increases. However, adjusting drive air has less affect on marking depth
than changing the pin stroke. In general, increasing the drive air pressure for the

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 11 -
same pin stroke, the basis marking time will shorten but the dot size and the marking
depth will increase.
VIBRATING MARKING HEADS Drive air pressure is the major factor in
determining the depth of the marking. The change of the drive air pressure can be
used to increase or decrease the marking depth. . High drive air pressure and a long
pin stroke will contribute to obtain deeper characters at initial impact point.

1.5 Marking surface

Marking depth change depending on the hardness of the material being marked.

Finishing
ADP - The finishing of the surface of a material is probably the most important
consideration to select the type of pin. Even on very hard material (Rockwell 40C), it is
possible to get a very readable marking to 0.0025 mm depth if the material has a surface
finishing "smooth as glass" ..
ALEA – it is possible to get a deep marking by suitable setting of the filling field: more
dense is the filling, greater will be the depth with longer marking times longer.

Hardness
ADP - The hardness of the material affects the size of the pin, the angle of the cone and
the material of the piston itself

1.6 Pin

There are several pins, different in size, material, length.

Dimension
At equal drive -return air pressure, on the same material, the heavier pin will produce a
deeper marking than lighter pins.

Cone angle

DOT MARKING HEADS


The cone angle is the angle at the tip of the pin. In case of larger cone angles (120°)
the dots marked are bigger in diameter. On the contrary, with smaller cone angles
(60°) the dots have smaller diameter. This marking head is used in case of marking at
defined dot (5x7, 11x16, etc.)

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 12 -
Dot marking pin and cartridge

MARKING HEADS AT DENSITY POINTS (CONTINUOUS). The cone angle is the


angle at the tip of the pin. Wider are the cone angles (120 °), bigger in diamater
are the marked points. On the contrary, with smaller the cone angles (60 °), deeper
and smaller in diameter are the points. This marking head is used in case of
markings in "continuous", ie density of points.

VIBRATING MARKING HEADS. The cone angle is the angle at the tip of the pin:
smaller are the cone angles (30 °), wider is the marking dept. On the contrary,
larger are the cone angles, deeper are the markings.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 13 -
SCRIBE MARKING HEADS

Available just the cone angle 90°, the tip of the pin is in sintered diamond.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 14 -
CHAPTER 2
The operating system

2.1 Using the controller

The controller runs the system software and generates commands to control the head.
The controller contains a graphic 7” touch widescreen

On the controller there is one button that allows to switch on and off the
display.

NOTE
Pressing the on / off button, all outputs,
controlled by the controller will disconnect.
This will make possible to forcibly stop the
execution of the machine cycle in case of
emergency.

IMPORTANT WARNING

Connect the power supply by gently inserting the plug to the rear of AC500,
sliding back the ending part of the connector plug.
Pay attention when removing the power supply connector.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 15 -
DO NOT PULL on the cord but hold the ending connector and gently remove it.

There are three led on the controller to indicate the system status:

• Blue Led: indicates the power status of the controller. If the light is on, it means
that the controller is receiving power.
• Green Led :indicates the execution status online of the machine. If the light is on,
it means that the system is ready to mark.
• Red Led :indicates any alarm condition or offline system. If the light is on, it
means that the system is in a state of alarm or offline, and it is not possible to
mark in this condition

2.2 Starting the software

WARNING
Verify that the operator has connected
a suitable filter to the marking system
and the company pneumatic supply. If
this is not respected there could be
serious damages to the system

WARNING
Make sure the controller is switched
off, before connecting/disconnecting
to the marking head.
This could cause serious damages to
the controller.

1. Connect the power supply supplied with the system to the electric distribution
(100-240VAC, 50-60Hz) and to the power supply connection on the back of the
controller. The controller is equipped with a protection fuse power input with
the following features: F4A-250V and it is placed in a fuse holder.
2. Power on the controller
3. Wait for the system booting. At this stage a screen with the indication of the wait
of the system loading will appear.
4. Once completed the booting, the software will start.
The system will perform a test to check the compatibility of the software system. If
the test won’t be successful, an error message will be shown, indicating the
procedures to be performed to configure the system properly.

CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS
REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING
TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 16 -
After the compatibility of firmware / kernel / software is confirmed, the system will display
the Main Screen Operator. The power supply will be given to the marking head.

Software main screen

In the table at the top left of the main software screen it will be shown the program that
is going to be performed. Each line of the table corresponds to a field of the program.
The columns of the table contain the information related to the type of field, the reference
position within the marking area and details for any information on the current field (these
vary by the type of field). On the table there will be a field to display the name of the
currently loaded program.

At the side of the table, a field allows to display the anchor point related to the program (
X and Y coordinates).

In the low right part of the program, there are two fields, regarding the expected
execution time of the program and the number of repeated executions of the program
itself.

At the bottom of the table of the program, a scroll bar allows to change the speed of
execution of the program. Depending on the value set in the scroll bar (percentage value,
reported on its right side), all speeds set by the environment parameters will be related
to its percentage value.

NOTE
It is not possible to delete the program
fields from the table. Only certain fields can be
modified from the table

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 17 -
1.
4
..
2.

6.

3.
7.

1. Name of the current pattern


2. Table of the current pattern
3. Scroll bar for working speed setting
4. Coordinates of the anchor point
5. Button for the preview of the current pattern
6. Expected time for marking the current pattern
7. Number of executions completed of the current pattern

The button recalls a 2d drawing preview of the currently loaded pattern.


.
During the program execution (simulation or marking cycle) , the preview will be
3. .
updated with the fields being marked and those already completed.
From the preview of the pattern, it will be possible to perform zoom operations within the
working area of the current pattern. To restore the default zoom (ie on the entire working
area) just click on the reset button

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 18 -
Software main screen with program preview

Scroll bar for Zoom


setting

Reset Zoom

Preview in full
screen

The button bar on the right side of the main screen contains some features for the
programs management and for the marking cycle.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 19 -
1. 1. Current day and hour of the system

2. 2. Button for loading a pattern already stored in the controller

3. 3. Button to get into the job editor

4. 4. Button for parking head positioning at the parking position

5. 5. Button for moving the marking head the pre-positioning


coordinates (corresponding to the start of the job/program)

6.
6. Cycle Management board : possibility to enable the cycle in
simulation or to perform a cycle in check area.

NOTE
Cycle management and head positioning
commands functions can be disabled when the
system is offline. If the system is correctly set
online, they are enabled

NOTE
The editing function is enabled only if the
working level is set to Supervisor, Distributor or
Manufacturer

In the lower part of the main screen there are buttons for the marking head and the user
security level management.

1.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

1. Label showing the current head status (online/offline).


2. Button for the management of the user security level
3. Button for the management of the marking head status
4. Button to enter the jog environment
5. Button to display the alarm status of the system
6. Button for the access to the auxiliary functions of the software
7. Button to start/stop the marking cycle of the current pattern
8. Button to stop the marking cycle of the current program

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 20 -
NOTE

Clicking on this icon always displayed on the


software screens . it is possible
NOTE to exit the current page

2.3 Set the status of the marking head ( online/offline)

The current head status (Offline / Online) is displayed both on the controller and on the
display .

Situation of offline head

Situation of online head

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 21 -
If the head is offline, on the controller and on the display following information will be
displayed:
• on the controller, the red led will be on and the green led will be off

• on the display the message “System offline” will be displayed in the machine status
label;
• on the display,the button visualizing the current head status will show the icon
• “offline”

• on the display the buttons of start cycle, stop cycle and entry in jog environment
will be disabled

To change the head status from offline to online:


- from the main menu, press the button of the current head status

- the head will move to the calibration position

If the head is online, following will be displayed both on the Controller and on the display:
• on the controller, the red led will be off and the green led will be on
• on the display the message “System online ”will be displayed on the machine status
label;
• on the display, the button visualizing the current head status will show the icon

“online”

• on the display the buttons of start cycle, stop cycle and jog entry will be enabled

While online, programs can be marked and the head can be moved using the software
commands.

To put the head offline:


- from the main menu, press the button of the current head
status

While the head is offline, all commands, such as marking, pre-positioning and parking, will
be disabled

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 22 -
2.4 Loading a program

To perform and mark a program, it is necessary to load it from the controller memory. If
there are no programs loaded, the software will appear as follows:

Main screen with no program loaded

In this situation it is impossible to launch the execution of a cycle of marking even if the
head is online .

To load a program:

- From the main menu, press the button for programs loading ;

- The system will display a new window showing the programs present in the
controller memory

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 23 -
Programs loading screen

- Choose the program to load between the ones on the list. In case many programs
are present in the memory, on the right side of the list a scroll bar will be displayed

- Once selected the program, press the loading button on the right of
the screen
In the example, the program “test.prg” will be uploaded.

The programs loading screen will close and the system will return to the software
main screen with the program loaded in the table dedicated.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 24 -
Main screen with program loaded

2.5 Parking the marking head

Each program has a parking position defined in its design. The parking location is often
used to move the head outside the marking window so that the operator
can easily remove or fix the piece marked.

NOTE
The head has to be Online and the pattern
loaded to use the parking button

To park the head:


1. Load a pattern
2. Put the head online
3. From the main menu, press the parking button to park the head
according with the coordinates already set.

The head will move to the parking position

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 25 -
ATTENTION

With the parking command, the


marking head will move. Before
confirming the command, verify to have
respected all safety precautions in
clothing and to have adopted the
individual hearing and sight protections
of the operator

If the parameter Automatic Parking has been enabled (see General parameters section in
this manual), the system will automatically move the marking head to the parking position
every time the system is Online, or after loading a new marking program

2.6 Prepositioning the marking head

This command moves the pin on the first field to mark of the loaded pattern.
This command is primarily used to align the marking head to the material to
be marked, before the beginning of the marking cycle.

To preposition the marking head:

1. Load a pattern
2. Put the head online

3. From the main menu press the Pre-positioning button


to place the marking head at the pre-positioning point

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 26 -
ATTENTION

With the Pre-positioning command,


the marking head will move. Before
confirming the command, verify to have
respected all safety precautions in
clothing and to have adopted the
individual hearing and sight protections
of the operator

2.7 Manual data entry

In some programs it’s requested the manual data entry prior to marking. These fields are
marked with a coloured line in the table

Example of variable text in the second line of the program

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 27 -
The variable fields are marked with the following syntax in a text field:

%V

When compiling the program, the text "% V" will be replaced by the text inserted in the
variable.

To enter a variable text in the message:

1. Press the line containing the text variable

2. The system will open the alphanumeric keyboard to allow the insertion of
the desired data

The alphanumeric keyboard

3. Write the desired data and press the Enter button on the keyboard. For example,
insert the text "var"

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 28 -
The Alphanumeric keyboard

4. From the main screen it will be possible to see the variable field updated with the
data just entered. In particular, the data will be reported in the third column of the
table corresponding to the modified variable line

Main screen with upgraded variable field

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 29 -
NOTE
In case of setting of a variable text with the
automatic cleaning of the variable , at the end
of a marking cycle value set will be cleaned and
it will be set to “zero”

2.8 Text with query

Programs may be composed of special flag messages in order to define more texts with
a single common reference base. The query text is stored in a dedicated table that can
be created modified by the Supervisor, Distributor or Manufacturer. The query are made
of a title and a text.
To modify the query table it is necessary to enter the auxiliary functions menu as
supervisor, distributor or manufacturer user and press the query button

The software will display the setting table query:

Query setting table

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 30 -
Each table row represents a query, to which two values are associated : the title and the
text.
Clicking on one of two cells of the table it will be possible to change the corresponding
value of the query It is also possible to enter a new query using the button
or cancel a query using the button

If the program contains a text using the command flag of the query, in the main screen it
will be displayed a “new” button

Pressing this button, it will be possible to display the query table, where the operator can
only modify the text field of the query and it will not be possible to insert or cancel query
from the table.

Main screen with a program loaded with query in the second field

Queries are identified with following syntax in a text field:

%[number]q or %[number]Q

where [number] corresponds to the query number, q to its title and Q to its texts.
In the example, there is a text field with the message “%1q_%1Q”, this means that
during program compilation, the flag “%1q “ and “%1Q” will be replaced by the title of
the first query (“%1q) and by its text (“%1Q ).

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 31 -
Following is the result obtained:

Main screen with the second field query preview

2.9 Dry marking (cycle simulation)

It is possible to simulate the marking of the loaded program without actually marking the
piece. This method is called “ Dry run marking” or “ Cycle simulation” . Using this
command it is possible to verify if the part to be marked is correctly positioned compared
to the message to mark.

To perform a dry run marking:

1. Load a pattern

2. Put the head online

3. Enable the execution cycle check in dry run marking mode

4. Launch the execution using the Start cycle button on display or from
external Start

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 32 -
Main screen with dry run marking cycle in progress

ATTENTION

With the Dry Run marking command,


the marking head will move. Before
confirming the command, verify to have
complied with all safety precautions for
the operator, who has to leave free the
working area of the head

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 33 -
2.10 Area check cycle

The area check cycle is a very similar function to the Dry Run marking and allows the
operator to verify within which limits will the program be performed. With the area check
function, the piece won’t be marked, same as for the Dry Run marking.

Example of area check cycle

In this cycle, the marking head will position within the four boundaries of the area
occupied by the program and will run them clockwise starting from lower left limit. In this
example the cycle will be:

1. Position of the head on P1 point;


2. Position of the head on P2 point;
3. Position of the head on P3 point;
4. Position of the head on P4 point;
5. Position of the head at the parking point coordinate.

To follow a cycle of area check:

1. Load a pattern
2. Place the head online
3. Enable the check of cycle execution in area check function

4. Launch the execution through the Start cycle button


on display or from external Start.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 34 -
Main screen with area check cycle in progress

ATTENTION

With the Area check command, the


marking head will move. Before
confirming the command, verify to have
complied with all safety precautions for
the operator, who has to leave free the
working area of the head

NOTE
The setting of the cycle in check area is
exclusive to the setting of Dry Run marking
cycle. This means that it is allowed to select
one of the two modes at a time.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 35 -
2.11 Marking a program

Before marking a program, please verify the following:

• correct regulation of the Drive / return air pressure


• correct positioning of the object to be marked
• correct regulation of the pin stroke

ATTENTION
When Online, the head will move to the
calibration position.

To mark a program:

1. Load a program
2. Place the head online
3. Ensure both the the program and the material to mark are ready for marking:
• Position and secure the piece to be marked
• Enter variable text, if applicable
• Enter query text, if applicable

4. Launch the execution through the Start cycle on display


or from external Start

ATTENTION

With the Marking command, the


marking head will move.
Before confirming the command, verify
to have respected all safety precautions
in clothing and to have adopted the
individual hearing and sight protections
of the operator. Do not clutter the
working area by inserting hands or
other under the pin

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 36 -
Main screen with marking cycle in progress

2.12 Marking time

In the main screen it is possible to display the execution time of the cycle of the loaded
program. The running time is in seconds with a display to 0.001 seconds
(milliseconds). The marking time is based on software machine data and depends
on the timing and speed parameters of moving and marking that have been set.

2.13 Stop the execution of a marking cycle

During the execution of a marking cycle, it will be possible to force a shutdown of the
cycle by pressing the button

The button is normally disabled and is enabled only at the beginning of a marking cycle.
Pressing the button, the cycle will be aborted and the marking head will stop in
the position where it was. Il the parameter “ Offline control unit in case of ABORT” is
enabled, the system will be put offline and it will be necessary to put the head again on
line to start a new marking cycle. Otherwise, if the parameter is disabled, the head will
remain online.

This feature can be used both in marking and in simulation of a cycle.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 37 -
NOTE
When interrupting a running cycle it will be
generated an alarm as STOP BY USER that
will be visible on the report screen of the
machine alarms.

2.14 Stop and re-start the execution of a marking cycle

During the execution of a marking cycle it will be possible to stop and then re-start the
operation.

To stop a cycle, press the button while the cycle is in progress.

The system will remain online and the head will stay still in the same position when the
cycle was stopped.
Unlike the command of abort cycle, it will be possible to restart from the point where the
cycle was stopped . To resume the cycle, press the button

This feature can be used both in marking and in simulation of a cycle.

ATTENTION
In case of interruption of a marking cycle,
do not move the material to be marked,
it could be possible to lose
the references to the marking head.
The result would be a wrong marking
when re- starting the cycle

2.15 Full Screen Preview

From the working environment It is possible display the program preview at full screen
size.

From the preview display screen, press the button to display a new full
size window showing the maximized program preview.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 38 -
Full size screen preview

2.16 Move the marking head

From the jog environment, it is possible to move the marking head


within its maximum X and Y coordinates.
To enter into the jog:

ATTENTION

With the Jog command, the marking


head will move. Before confirming the
command, verify to have respected all
safety precautions in clothing and to
have adopted the individual hearing
and sight protections of the operator.
Do not clutter the working area, by
inserting hands or other under the pin

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 39 -
1. Place the head online;

2. Press the Jog button in the main screen

3. The system will display the jog screen

Jog screen

4. Enter the speed axis motion in the special text box

1. 1. Current speed of the axis


2. Speed set by the user

2.

5. To move the axis, press the buttons related to the movement

1 X axis movement to the right;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 40 -
2 X axis movement to the left;

3 X axis movement to the right with step;

4 X axis movement to the left with step;

5 Y axis movement upwards;

6 Y axis movements downwards;

7 Y axis movement upwards with step;

8 Y axis movement downwards with step;

6. To move the axis to a specific axis coordinate

a. Enter the coordinate to position the axis in the special text box

1. 1. Current value of the related axis


2. New value set by the user

2.

b. Press the Start button

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 41 -
The marking head will move to the axis quote set.

It’s possible to set a quote of displacement for the step movements. To set this quota,
enter a value in the box.

It is possible to stop a movement in a specific axis location, by pressing the button

Finally there is an additional PIN DROP functionality button, which allows to enable the
descent of the marking pin within the environment

WARNING: Make sure that the head is in a safe position before pressing this button.

2.17 Select the operating level

To select the operating level to control the machine, simply press the
operational level button in the main screen:

• User;

• Supervisor;

• Distributor;

• Manufacturer.

Pressing the button it is possible to change the operative level. Supervisor, Distributor
and Manufacturer levels are protected by password to limit the access.

Pressing the button, a new screen will show the selectable user levels . If one of these is
protected by password, it will be necessary to insert it to change the current level.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 42 -
User level selection screen

Privileges of the User level

In user mode it is possible:

• Open a new program in the working environment;

• Insert variable/query text from working environment ;

• Modify the marking speed from working environment;

• Put the head Online/Offline;

• Move the head from Jog environment;

• Display the list of all alarms and program statistics

• Display the markings history

• Display the information about the controller storage capacity

• Switch-off the controller

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 43 -
Privileges of the Supervisor level

In supervisor mode it is possible:

• All functions of user mode;

• To enter the environment of programs modification;

• Reset the counter of repetitions number;

• Set the user commands;

• Enter the programs management;

• Set some general machine parameters;

• Select the current language of the software ;

• Save the back-up data of the system;

• Select the current head in the list of the available heads;

• Configure the serial port settings;

• Configure barcode reader;

• Apply filters in the markings history;

• Export data of the marking history;

• Configure the network settings of the controller

Privileges of the Distributor level

In distributor mode it is possible:

• All functions of supervisor mode;

• Set all the general machine parameters;

• Enter the calibration environment;

• Enter the test screen of the machine;

• Set the maintenance data;

• Reset of the statistics;

• Make the backup of the system;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 44 -
• Upgrade the system;

• Delete or restore the backup data of the system;

• Enable/disable the system languages;

• Configure the controller network settings .

Privileges of the Manufacturer level

In manufacturer mode it is possible:

• All functions of distributor mode;

• Set the axis parameters;

• Set the marking heads data in the head store;

• Reset the alarms history;

• Add, delete or modify the languages of the system;

• Reset the entries of the marking history

2.18 Displaying the controller version

It is possible to display the software. firmware and kernel version installed in the
controller.

To display the software version installed on the controller, it is necessary to go


to the screen of the auxiliary functions and press the button about.

About button

The system will display a new screen with the software information. Also following
information will be available:

• Type of the machine set;

• The configuration: in case it won’t be recognized a valid configuration, it will be


displayed as "unknown", further if the configuration has been changed, it will be
inserted a character '*' at the bottom.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 45 -
Screen displaying the controller versions

2.19 Switch off the controller

To turn off the controller, press the appropriate button in the environment of software
information. This procedure is especially important because it is required in saving all the
information of the machine before removing the power supply.

To turn off the controller, it is necessary to enter the auxiliary functions screen and press
the button About.

About button

A new window with all software information will be displayed.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 46 -
Screen displaying the software versions

A button to turn – off the controller will be displayed

Shutdown button

When pressing the button , it will be requested a confirmation to proceed with the
operation. It is necessary to confirm the request to proceed. At the end of the operation a
message showing the possibility to remove the power supply from the controller will be
displayed.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 47 -
Screen showing shutdown operation completion

ATTENTION
Once started the shutdown procedure it will no
more be possible to navigate within software
environments.

ATTENTION
Turning off the controller before the operation
completion can cause possible data loss.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 48 -
CHAPTER 3
Create a program

A program is a file containing a list of fields. For each field are associated some
parameters used to describe the execution and the marking on the material to be marked.
The controller contains a memory for the storage of the programs. These can be loaded
and executed by the machine at any time. This chapter shall provide information on how
to create, edit and manage a program memory that can be marked by the machine. In
particular:

• Some considerations on programs and fields that compose them;

• Creation of new programs;

• Modification of existing programs;

• Importing / exporting programs from a USB key.

3.1 Set the operating level

To have access to functionalities for creating, editing or deleting the programs stored in
the controller, it is necessary to set the operating level on supervisor, distributor or
manufacturer mode.

3.2 Basic considerations of the programs and fields

The creation of a program requires the knowledge of a number of parameters that define
the content and aspect of each field of the program itself. To create a program it must be
considered the size of the marking area, the field type, the font size, the font selection,
the marking mode and the order in which fields must be marked.

Dimensions of the marking area


The size of the marking area is a main consideration in program creation. Any field that
will be marked must be contained, its entirety, within the physical boundaries of the area.
If not, the system will display an error message in case of attempt to mark it. It is possible
to redefine the field’s location or make slight adjustments to its size or to alignment
parameters to reposition it within the area. The size of the marking area is dependent on
the parameters set in the software in the configuration phase.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 49 -
Fields types
A program can be composed of one or more fields.. There are different types of fields,
and, based on the type, the parameters to be set during the creation of a field change.
Fields can be of the following types:

• Text;
• Line;
• Arc;
• Arc text;
• BMP image;
• Datamatrix;
• DXF File;
• Pause;
• GoTo;
• Comment.

Define the field coordinates


The system uses the X and Y coordinates to identify the location of each field within the
marking area . These values can be defined inserting by hand the specific coordinates into
the appropriate fields. Otherwise, the piston/laser cartridge can be moved towards the
desired position and set, as coordinates of the field, the current position coordinates of the
marking head. Whenever it must define an axis coordinate, the marking head can be
interactively positioned in the desired point.

Character dimensions
The three parameters that control the size and shape of the character are: the height, the
width and the pitch.

Height. Height is measured from the center of


the dot at the top of the character, at the center
of the dot at the bottom of the character.

Width. Width is measured from the center of the


dot on the left side of the character, at the center
of the dot on the right side of the character.
Unless there is a specific width requirement from
the user, the width should be 66% of the
character height.

Pitch. The pitch defines the distance from the


start of one character to the start of the next
character. It includes the width of the character
and the space between two characters. Unless
there is a specific character spacing requirement,
the pitch should equal the character height.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 50 -
Font selection
The system provides several font selections for the text fields to be marked. The
character font determines the marked appearance of the text. Each font selection
provides a specific set of character. Standard Automator fonts are illustrated in Appendix
A of this manual.
Custom fonts may be loaded and are called TTF. These fonts can be imported on the
controller and used in the creation of a text field.

Some factors to consider when selecting a font are the size of the characters, the marking
speed, the identification or the recognition of the characters.

Size
The desired size of the characters must be a primary consideration when selecting a
font

DOT MARKING SYSTEMS. Very small characters may have a better appearance with a
font containing a fewer dot definition (e.g., 5x7). Very large characters will benefit
from fonts with higher dot densitiy (e.g., 11x16). Characters with a higher dot density
are suitable for graphic forms that require more definition.
VIBRATING MARKING SYSTEMS Very small characters may have a better appearance
with a font containing less endings (e.g., SIMPLEX). Large characters may benefit
from a font containing more endings, (e.g., COMPLEX or DIN). Characters with more
endings create more defined shapes
SCRIBE MARKING SYSTEMS Rounded characters can have a better performance and
define a better management of the movements along the axes. The custom font can
be created using the Font Creator application.
LASER MARKING SYSTEMS Very small characters can have a great look thanks to the
micrometric size of the laser beam.

Speed
The marking speed is another consideration when selecting a font. Certain fonts may
require a longer marking time. Character size also affects the marking speed. Smaller
characters may be marked faster; larger characters, characters with higher dot
density, and characters with more endings may require longer marking times.

Character Recognition
The OCR font and PS-OCR font are specially designed to be used with the
AUTOMATOR PS-OCR® Optical Character Reader. In order for the characters to be
reliably read by the Reader, a special relationship should exist between the character
height, width, and pitch.

Please follow the instructions for setting the text dimensions that must be read by PS-
OCR Reader:
Decide the height of the characters. The height parameter will be used as basis to fix
the width and pitch parameters.

1. Set the width character equal to ½ height.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 51 -
1. Set the pitch equal to the height.

These settings will create a square character block (height x pitch) with
the actual character occupying the first half of the character block. This relationship

gives a ratio height/width that allows the reader to recognize the


characters, and offers enough space between characters to provide reliable readings.

For example, if the character must be 0.5 mm high:


* set the width to 0.25 mm
* set the pitch to 0.5 mm

Marking Order
The systems marks fields of a message in the order in which they have been defined.
The head will mark the first field in its entirety before moving to the subsequent fields.
Normally, this is not an issue when creating a pattern, But, it may be beneficial to
mark fields in a particular sequence,for example to improve the marking cycle
efficiency. In case, the sequence of the fields can be rearranged. See below Defining
a program.

Marking modes

The software offers several ways to mark the fields of its programs. Since the
parameter is defined with the field, it is possible to specify the marking mode

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 52 -
from field to field.

DOT-MARKING With this mode it is possible to mark the dot-matrix characters with
a style defined by the selected font.

CONTINUOUS MARKING Continuous mode allows to define the dots density to mark
fully formed characters that produce an engraved appearance. Higher is the density of
the dots, higher the marking time and fast the wear of the piston.

3.3 Creating a pattern

When creating a new program, the system stores it in the controller’s permanent memory.
Each program must be identified by a name. Once saved into memory, it can be loaded to
be marked or edited whenever necessary.
To create a new program it is necessary:

1. Set the operating level in Supervisor, Distributor or Manufacturer mode;

2. From the software main screen,press the editor program access button ;

3. The software will display the programs editor environment

Screen of programs editor

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 53 -
From editor environment, press he button to create a new pattern ;

4. If another program has been already uploaded , a messages window asking whether to
save the current program or not will be displayed. In case of changes to the program
that must be saved, press the confirmation button ("Yes") otherwise press the cancel
button ("No") to continue without saving ;

5. A window with an empty program will be displayed in the editor environment.

Editor programs screen with empty program

6. Insert the name of the program and the fields to mark (see the section Setting the
fields in the program);

7. Save the pattern, pushing on the Save button . If the memory of the
controller already contains a program with the same name of the current program, a
messages window with the request to overwrite the program in memory or not will be
displayed.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 54 -
3.4 Screen of editor programs

The editor program environment allows to create, upload and edit programs on
the controller. The editor environment is accessible only by users with operative level
Supervisor, Distributor or Manufacturer . The basic editor screen is as follows:

Editor screen

The editor screen is divided into several sections: the general settings of the program, the
fields that make the program and the setting of each field.

1. 2. 3.
1. Text box for setting and displaying of
the program name;

4. 2. Scrolling Menu to set and display the


field type selected;

3. Scrolling Menu to set and display the


marking quality of the selected field;

4. Area showing the setting and


displaying the data concerning the
program and the selected field.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 55 -
3
1. .

2. 4

5.
7.
6.

8.

1. Text boxes for setting and displaying the anchor point of the program;
2. Text boxes for setting and displaying the parking point of the program;
3. Button to enter the setting and displaying environment of the default data of text field;
4. Button to enter the setting and displaying environment of the default the data of the serial
number of the program.
5. Button to enter the setting and displaying environment of the data related to the CSV field.
6. Running time scheduled for the current program.
7. Data for setting the background image of the preview of the program.
8. Data for setting the background grid of the preview of the program.

1.
2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1. Table to display and select the fields of a pattern;


2. Button to add a new field, at the end of the program;
3. Button to delete the selected field;
4. Button to add a new field in the current position of the pattern table;
5. Button to cut the selected field;
6. Button to copy the selected field;
7. Button to past a field, previously cut or copied;
8. Button to find and replace a particular text with another one created by the user.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 56 -
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
1. Button to display the program data;
2. Button to launch a compilation of the current program;
3. Button to preview the current program;
4. Button to save the program in the controller memory;
5. Button to load a program from the memory of the controller;
6. Button to create a new program;
7. Button to exit the editor.

The following sections will explain in detail all possible editor features of the programs.

3.5 Setting program parameters

Certain parameters and options may be defined and stored in the program. Unlike the
system parameters that affect all patterns and all operations, the program parameters
affect only the currently loaded pattern. They can be defined when the pattern is created,
or can be changed at a later time.
Message parameters are used to:
* define the program anchor point;
* define the program parking position;
* set the program serial number;
* configure the settings for the data to mark from CSV file;
* define the default parameters of the text field;
* set a background image for the program preview ;
* set the background grid for the program preview .

3.6 Define the anchor point of the program

The pattern fields are defined by coordinates referred to the lower left corner of the
marking area. However , when setting the marking program , difficulties could arise if in a
second time it should be necessary to move the fields.

The software offers the possibility to set the coordinates of the anchor point, which refer
the definition of X and Y of the individual fields, so that while changing values on the axis,
the related fields move automatically accordingly.

Supposing that after the definition of the fields in the program, all of them need to be
resettled. Without the anchor point, all the fields must be displaced, one to one,
according to the new coordinates X and Y; otherwise the different fields can be moved in
an easiest way, hooking them to a single anchor point and, changing its coordinates.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 57 -
In this way when the anchor point of a program is modified , the system will transfer the
first field of the program in the new location and consequently also all other fields of the
same program.

To set the anchor point:

1. From the editor screen of the program, set the coordinates of the anchor point in
the appropriate text boxes dedicated

The coordinates must refer to point 0,0 of the marking area and must be located
within it.

It is also possible to acquire the anchor point through the jog environment.

Press the button to proceed

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 58 -
NOTE
The marking head must be online to position the
field with the jog.

2. Save the program


NOTE

After adjusting the X and Y coordinates of the


anchor point, verify with the compilation button
that changes have not brought the fields out of
the marking area.

3.7 Define the head parking position

Each program has the possibility to define a parking area, where the head will move once
the marking cycle will be completed, for example to facilitate loading and unloading of the
material to be marked. The parking position may be different for each program and must
include the coordinates of the 2 axis, X and Y.

NOTE
The head must be online and the program
loaded to enable the parking command.

To set the parking position:

1. From the editor screen, set the parking coordinates in the text boxes :

Coordinates values are referred to 0,0 point of the marking area and must be
located in this area.

It is also possible to acquire the anchor point through the jog environment.

Press the button to proceed

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 59 -
NOTE
The marking head must be online to position the field
with the jog.

2. Save the pattern

ATTENTION

With the Jog command, the marking


head will move. Before confirming the
command, verify to have respected all
safety precautions in clothing and to
have adopted the individual hearing
and sight protections of the operator.
Do not clutter the working area, by
inserting hands or other under the pin

3.8 Define the default parameters of the text field

When creating a text field in a program, the system automatically supplies certain default
values. These values are necessary to set the size, the shape, the graphic of the text to
be marked. It is possible to change the defaults values according with user’s exigencies.

To set the default parameters of the text field:

1. From the editor screen, press the configuration of the text default parameters

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 60 -
2. The software will display a window screen that will allow the selection of the default
parameters to be set in the text field

Configuration screen of default text field parameters

Configuration parameters are divided according to the style of the font of the text
field:

• Standard Font
It is possible to set the default parameters of the text fields with the
standard font. The characteristic change according with the density of
the font dots ,size, height, width and pitch of the font, and the text marking
mode.
• TTF
It is possible to set the default parameters of the text field with TTF fonts.
These parameters concern the font type ( between the ones present in the
memory of the controller) and the font height.

3. Once set the defaults values to use for the text fields, save them. In order to keep
the modified data as default parameters press the button

Otherwise to keep the previous parameters, press on the button


(following to this step, the modified data will be lost)

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 61 -
3.9 Use customs fonts

The software also allows to import custom character sets that can be used to mark text
fields. Custom fonts are created using Font Creator software and can be inserted from the
environment of File management. Once uploaded on the controller they can be selected
from the drop-down menu. Custom fonts are distinguishable because they will include the
extension efc. in the name

Screen of selection of a customs font

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 62 -
Preview screen of a text with characters from custom font

NOTE
Custom fonts may not contain all characters
that can be inserted. If the characters inserted
in the text to mark contain characters not
present in the custom font, they will be
compiled as padding characters (blank).

NOTE
Custom fonts can not be used in all working
modes (points, continuous and vibration). This
depends on how the font has been created.

3.10 Setting the program serial number

The program serial number is stored in the program and it belongs only to the program
where it is. The program serial number is independent of other serial numbers of other
programs.

The pattern serial number is marked each time a field containing the %S flag is marked.

The pattern serial number may be set to increment :


- each time the program is marked
- every time each program field containing this command is marked.

Accordingly to the set increasing value:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 63 -
• Positive (increase> 0)

When the serial number reaches the upper limit, the number can:

- reset to the lower limit set in a separate numbering table;

- stop the operation of marking until action is taken in setting the numbering.

• Negative (increment <0)

When the serial number reaches the lower limit, the number can:

- reset to the upper limit set in a separate numbering table;

- stop the operation of marking until action is taken in setting the numbering.

To set the values of the pattern serial number:

1. From the editor screen, press the configuration button of the parameters of the
serial number

2. The software will display a screen that will allow to set the configuration data of the
serial number management.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 64 -
a. c.

d.
b.

Screen for the serial number setting

a. In this section, it will be possible to set the mode of use of the serial number:

- Limit mode
Parameter that indicates the management mode of the serial number in case
the value reaches one of the two limits ( based to the increase set).
• Wrap
Management mode of the serial number that allows to return to the
minimum value (or maximum, depending on the increase set) if
the maximum value has been reached (or minimum, according to the
increase set). Effectively the serial number is reset to an initial value
and allows to continue to mark without interruption by the user.

• STOP
Management mode of the serial number that allows to stop the
execution when the maximum value of the serial number has been
reached (or minimum , according with the increase set).

- Increment mode
This parameter specifies the increment mode of the serial number.
• Pattern
Increment mode according with the program. The serial number will
be incremented, according with the value set as increment , only at
the end of program execution.
• Field.
Increment mode according with the program’s field.
The serial number is incremented, according with the value set as
increment, only at the end of the execution of a field using the serial
number.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 65 -
- Increment value
Parameter indicating how must the serial number be incremented, based
on the increment mode set. The increment value can assume positive
negative values.

Reset serial number


Parameter indicating the reset mode and its enabling. The software allows
to configure the reset type to use (per hour, per day etc.) and, according
with the different mode selected, it is possible to enter the related values.

• HOUR
Allows to set the reset time of the serial number of the
current program. For example, if it the reset time is at 02:00, as
soon as the software will recognize that that time has passed, it will
reset the serial number of the program.

• DAY
Allows to set the reset day of the week time of the serial number of the
current program. For example, if it is set Monday as the reset day, as
soon as the software will recognize that day has passed, it will
reset the serial number of the program.

• DATE
Allows to set the reset the day of a month of the serial number of the
current program. For example, if it is set the 15th of the month as the
reset day, as soon as the software will recognize that date is passed, it
will reset the serial number of the program. If it is set as date the 31 of
the month, in case of month with lower number of days, it will be
considered the last valid date of the month.
• SHIFT
Allows to set the shift reset of the serial number of the current program.
For example, if it is set the second shift as reset, as soon as the software
will recognize that shift is passed, it will reset the serial number of the
program.

In case of setting a positive increment of the serial number (> 0), the serial number
will be reset on the minimum limit set. If the serial number is negative, the serial
number will be reset on the maximum limit set.

b. In this section it will be possible to set the current value of the serial number
and the minimum and maximum value where the serial value will place. The
current value must be included within the minimum and maximum value set.
Further, the minimum value set must be lower than the maximum value.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 66 -
c. In this window it will be possible to set the necessary parameters for the
management of the alphanumeric values within the serial number.

- Number of digits
Parameter that indicates how many alphanumeric digits are to be managed
in the serial number. If digit number’s value is =0, the parameters of the
alphanumeric value will be disabled.

- Positioning in the serial number


Parameter that indicates where the alphanumeric digits must be placed
inside the serial number.

• BEGINNING
Positioning of the alphanumeric digits are at the beginning of the serial
number.

In this case, the increase of serial value and the controls on the maximum
values will be modified and referred also to the values of alphanumeric
digits .
If the serial number is “A101”, where “A” is the alphanumeric value, when
increasing, if numeric value will reach the maximum value set in the
parameter of the serial number, the numeric value will be set equal to the
minimum value and the alphanumeric value will be increased (or
decreased) of one digit- I.e:

Minimum value = 10
Maximum numeric value = 101
Current numeric value = 101
Increase = +1

Alphanumeric value = “A”

The result of the serial number “A101” , once increased, will be: “B10”.

• END
Positioning of the alphanumeric digits at the end of the serial number
field.

In this case, the management of the increase of the serial value and the
controls on the maximum values will be modified and referred to the
values of alphanumeric digits .

If the serial number is “101A”, where “A” is the alphanumeric value, when
increasing, the alphanumeric value will be increased (or decreased) of
one digit- I.e:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 67 -
Minimum value = 10
Maximum numeric value = 101
Current numeric value = 101
Increase = +1

Alphanumeric value = “A”

The result of the serial value “101A” , once increased, will be: “101B”.

If the alphanumeric value reaches the maximum alphanumeric value set,


the numeric value will increase of the numeric value set and the
alphanumeric value will be set at its minimum level

- General parameters of alphanumeric digits


General parameters that are used for setting the current value, the minimum
value and the maximum value of the alphanumeric digits.

d. In this window it will be possible to set the necessary parameters for the
management of the repetition numbers of the serial numbers.

- Current value
Parameter indicating the current number of the repetitions performed.

- Number of repetitions
Parameter how many repetitions of the current serial number must be
performed.

These two values are required to fix how many times the system has to mark
the current serial number. The current value of the repetitions number
indicate how many times it has been already performed. When this value
reaches the number of repetitions set, the serial number will be incremented
( according with the settings).

If the number of repetitions is 0 (zero) this management will not be used.

When using the repetitions number of the serial number, in case of cycle
Abort, it will be used the procedure indicated in the general parameter
“Abort management for serial number repetitions” ( see section Setting of
general parameters present in the software).

3.11 Setting the configuration for the data to mark from CSV file

The software allows to mark data even from a worksheet in CSV format. It will be possible
to take the data from the table of CSV file and mark them in a program. This management
is very flexible from operator side, since the data collection modes from the file are fully
settable. These parameters are explained in detail in this chapter. The settings of CSV

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 68 -
management are referred to the program, for this reason it is possible to set the same file
in several programs and mark it with totally different modes.

As for the serial numbers, it is possible to use the data present on the CSV file through the
special command flag %t. For further details please see the section of the flag commands.

To set the data from CSV management:

1. From the editor screen, press the configuration button of the management of the
parameters of CSV management

2. The software will display a window allowing to set the configuration data of
of CSV management

Data configuration screen for CSV management

From this screen it will be possible to set all possible settings for the customizing of the
CSV management use.It is also present a preview table of the selected CSV file from
which it will be possible to select the various reference cells. Here below the description of
all parameters present in the screen:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 69 -
- File name

It specifies the file to use for the current management. The file can be uploaded from
the controller memory or directly from USB key. In case the file is uploaded from the
USB key, it will be displayed “[USB]” following the file name. In order to select the file
to use it is necessary to press the button on the right of the text box.

Button for CSV file loading

- Current cell

It defines the cell from which the first data to mark will be taken. The displayed data
are referred to the rows and columns of the table. The values are referred to the
position in rows and columns of the table. For example: if this field is set to 1;2 , the
current cell will be in the first row/second columns of the table.
It is possible to select the current cell directly from the CSV preview through the button
on the left of the text box. .

Button for cell selection

Pressing this button the cell actually selected will be displayed as current cell.
Selecting any cell on the table, the value of the current cell will be modified according
with the selected cell.
In order to remove the selection mode of the cell , press again on the cell selection
button.
It is also possible to set manually the current cell just pushing the text box of
reference.

- Scan type

It defines the type of scrolling of the table according with the parameter of increase
selected. The selectable scan types of the table are: rows scan or columns scan

Rows scan
The program will increase the rows starting from the current cell. At the last row, the
program will automatically switch to next column.
Columns scan
The program will increase the columns starting from the current cell. At the last
column, the program will automatically switch to next row.
When the program will finish the last executable cell, the CSV will be considered as
processed.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 70 -
- Increase

It defines the number of cells increase for each use of a CSV command. The increase
value works together with the type of scan to determine how to extract information
from CSV table. The increase will be done each time a flag field %t is used.

- Mode empty cell

It defines the mode to follow in case of presence of an empty cell during the table
scan. The settable values are : ignore, following row, following column, stop and
custom.

Ignore
In case of the presence of an empty cell during the scan, it will be normally placed
inside the field. This will allow to handle an empty cell as a normal cell of the table.
Following row
In case of the presence of an empty cell during the scan, it will be skipped and taken
the cell in the next row. In case of several consecutive empty cells, they will be
skipped until the first non-empty cell. .
Following column
In case of the presence of an empty cell during the scan, it will be skipped and taken
the cell in the next column. In case of several consecutive empty cells, they will be
skipped until the first non-empty cell.
Stop
The marking will be prevented in case of an empty cell during the scan. This case will
be handled as the end of CSV,
Custom
In case of the presence of an empty cell during the scan, the cell set in the field
custom cell will be considered as current cell.

- Cell custom mode

It defines the cell of the table where the program must be placed in case of empty cell
and empty cell mode set on custom cell. The displayed values are referred to the rows
and the columns of the table. The values are referred to the rows and columns position
of the table. For example : if the field is set to 1;2 the custom cell will be in the first
row/second column of the table.
It is possible to select the custom cell directly from CSV preview through the button on
the right of the text box.

Button for cell selection

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 71 -
Pressing this button the cell actually selected as custom cell will be displayed.
Selecting any other cell on the table, the value of the custom cell will be modified
according with the selected cell.
To remove the cell selection mode, press again the button of cell selection.
It is also possible to set manually the custom cell pressing the reference text box.

- Delete file after execution

Using this parameter it is possible to enable the file cancellation at the end of the
execution. The execution of the last cell of the table and the positioning on empty cell
with empty cell mode set on stop are both considered as conditions of end of
execution.

3.12 Define the background image of the preview of the program

The software allows to associate, for each program stored in the memory, a PNG image
to be displayed in the preview program. This image can be useful to represent some
dimensions present in the piece to mark (for example the tags) and thus can help the
placement of the fields from preview.
The image to set the in the preview of the program must be present in the memory of the
controller.
An additional parameter allows to set the degree of opacity (and therefore relative
transparency) of the image to display.

To set the data of the program preview:

1. From the editor screen of the program ,enable the background management using
the special check enable ;

Window to enable the background management for preview

2. Select the image to associate with the program;

3. Set the degree of opacity of the image ;

Minimum opacity degree Maximum opacity degree

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 72 -
Example of preview with background image

3.13 Define the background grid of the program preview

For each program stored in the memory, the software allows to associate a grid to display
in the program preview. This grid is useful to display with more precision the position of
the fields within the working area and can help the positioning of the fields from preview.

The software allows also to set the pitch to use to represent the grid in the program
preview. Another parameter allows to set the degree of opacity ( and consequently its
transparency) of the image to display.

To set the data of the program preview:

1. From the editor screen, enable the management of the background through the
enabling of the check.

Window for the enabling of the background management for preview

2. Set the pitch to use in the grid representation;

3. Set the degree of opacity of the grid;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 73 -
Minimum degree of opacity Maximum degree of opacity

Example of preview with background grid

3.14 Adding fields to a program

After creating a program, it is necessary to add fields to define the contents, format, and
location of the data to mark.. There are several types of fields. Each message may contain
an infinite number of field that are marked following their insertion . It is possible to modify
the fields sequence to improve the marking process using the cut/copy/paste operations.

To set one or more fields in the program:

1. [optional] Place the head online.(This may facilitate defining the field location at a
later time);

2. Load the desired pattern or create a new one;


3. Get into the Editor program environment and press on the button to add a new

field at the end of the program.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 74 -
The screen will display a window to select the type of the new field.

Selection screen of the type of the field

4. Select the new field to add, according with the fields proposed. Following are the
selectable fields:

• Text
• Line
• Arc
• Text on arc
• Datamatrix
• Pause
• Goto
• Bitmap image
• Comment
• DXF

The system will open a page concerning the setting of the parameters of the
selected field.

5. Set the parameters of the selected field;

6. Once completed the parameters insertion , save the program using the appropriate
button.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 75 -
The parameters of the fields are divided into general and advanced ones. These
parameters are well distinguishable because they are divided into two different tabs
placed on the left of the window dedicated to the setting of the fields parameters.

Editor screen with text field (highlighted data tabs)

While the General parameters of the field depend on the type of the field, the advanced
data are related to further features that can be used when editing or running the program.

Screen displaying the advanced data of the field

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 76 -
The advanced data can be:

• Enabling “template” mode;

• Enabling “mirror” mode;

• Setting of the repetition numbers of the filed

The template mode allows to display the current field but not to mark it. This property is
used to simplify an alignment among some fields, of which one must not be marked.. Of
course the template mode will be usable only from executables fields and therefore not on
the fields of type GoTo, Pause, etc.

Example of preview of a field of template text

Mirror mode allows to mirror the current field, both in displaying and in execution. The
mirror mode allows to run the field in mirror mode as follows:

Example of mirror field

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 77 -
The mirror mode will be usable only from the executable fields and not on fields of type
GoTo, Pause, ecc

Example of preview of a mirrored text field

The repetitions number allows to set a number of repetitions, for both rows and columns ,
of the current field. For both repetition modes it is possible to set an offset between one
field and the next one.
The template mode will be usable only from the executable fields and not on fields of type
GoTo, Pause, ecc.

Example of repetitions

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 78 -
To set the numbers of repetitions it is necessary to press the button of repetitions
configuration:

Button of repetitions configuration

And set the appropriate values in the configuration screen of repetitions:

Screen of repetitions configurations

The repetitions number of the field will be calculated and it will be possible to execute the
field as follows:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 79 -
Program preview screen of program with fields with repetitions

3.14.1 Parameters of the text field

The text field is defined by the size, the shape, the position and the content of the string
of characters. Following are the parameters to be defined in the text field:

Page of parameters setting of the text field (Font default)

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 80 -
Page of parameters setting of the text field (Font TTF)

Text It defines the string content that can contain lowercase and
uppercase characters , keyboard symbols, blank spaces, and special
message called FLAG.
These commands are introduced by the percent sign % and
followed by letters. each one corresponding to a command. They
are needed to insert in the text content values to be updated such
as the date, time, turn, the serial number.

Font It defines the character to display in the string view.


Characters changes from the one of defaults of the check to the
custom ones ( font TTF)

Default Font

Type defines the system proprietary font to be used. Proprietary fonts


available are the following: 5x7, 11x16, OCR, 11x16 CH e AHSA. The system
will also display other custom fonts, if available, after the default characters.

NOTE

Some proprietary fonts may not contain the full


characters of ASCII code

Character height is measured from the center of the bottom point to the
center of the upper point of the character to mark.
Character width is measured from the center on the left point to the
center of the right point of the character to mark.
Pitch is measured from the center of the left point of one character to the
center of the point at the beginning of the next character, including the

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 81 -
character width and the space between two characters. Generally, the pitch
and the character height have equal values.
Total Length of the Text indicates how long is the text according with
the numbers of characters present and to the width parameters of pitch
and character.
Ratio indicates the repeat to use between the height and the width of the
characters. If selected, both values will be “ blocked” in order to keep the
same repeat; when one of them will be modified, the other will be
recalculated.

NOTE

Automatic calculation of the height, width


and pitch parameters of the character and
total length if just one of these parameters
is modified, the software will recalculate
automatically the updated values of the other
fields.

TTF
Font TTF font type that can be selected

Character height is measured from the center of the top point to


the center of the upper point of the character to mark.

For laser machine it is possible to select the TTF Font Filling function. If the filling
parameter is enabled (see general settings section in this manual), the related button will
be displayed on the screen.

Configuration button of filling parameters

Pressing the configuration button of the filling parameters, a screen will show the settable
values of these parameters:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 82 -
Configuration screen filling parameters

Marking type: indicates the marking type to use for following field. The settable values
are: border, filling or both.

Marking sequence: settable only if marking type is set to both. It indicates the order of
execution of marking. It can be set to: border>filling (border first then filling) and
filling>border (filling first then border).

Orientation: indicates the orientation to run for the filling. The settable values are:
horizontal, vertical, diagonal and crossed.

Horizontal Vertical Diagonal Cross


Horizontal Vertical Diagonal Crossed

Filling step it indicates the distance between filling lines. A low pitch value indicates an
higher lines density, vice versa an high pitch value indicates a low lines density.

Example of field with high filling pitch

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 83 -
Example of field with low filling pitch

Inclination 1 filling It can be set only if the orientation type is set to diagonal or
crossed. It indicates the inclination angle of the filling lines.

Inclination 2 filling It can be set only if the orientation type is set to crossed. It
indicates the inclination angle of the secondary filling lines.
.

X, Y They define the field coordinates within the marking area.


The coordinates refer to the field justification.

Justification It defines the point to which the coordinate refer to compared to the field

L/T (Left/Top) – Justification on the Top Left


L/M (Left/Middle) – Justification in the Middle Left
L/B (Left/Bottom) – Justification in the Bottom Left
C/T (Center/Top) – Justification in the Middle Top
C/M (Center/Middle) – Justification in the Middle
C/B (Center/Bottom) – Justification in the Bottom middle
R/T (Right/Top) – Justification on the Top Right
R/M (Right/Middle) – Justification in the Middle Right
R/B (Right/Bottom) – Justification in the Bottom Right

In case of marking of lowercase and uppercase characters with the justification


IN THE BOTTOM justification, the marking will be

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 84 -
Mode It defines the marking mode that will be used for the current field.

Density If in continuous mode, it is possible to fix the density of dots ( dots


density per inches or centimeters) . Higher is the density of the
dots, higher is the marking time and faster the pin wear.
Angle Define the rotation angle of the field, around its anchor point. The
reference 0° (no rotation) corresponds to 3 o’clock on the dial of a
clock; increasing the angle, the field will rotate counterclockwise.

Rotations of the string

Quality Define the marking quality, according to the set marking head.
According with the selected quality, the marking will be more or
less defined. This will affect the machine performances.

3.14.2 Parameters of the line field

The line field is defined by the coordinates of the two points between which the line is
included.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 85 -
Setting page of the parameters of text field

X, Y (P1) They defines the coordinates of the first point. This is considered as
the starting point of the line.
X, Y (P2) They defines the coordinates of the second point. This is considered as
the arrival point of the line .
P2 Reference It defines what point P2 refers to. If it is set to the absolute position
it means that it will use as reference the point of origin of the
marking area. Or, if it is set at the relative position, the coordinates
will refer to the point P1 of the line.

Mode It defines the marking mode that will be used to mark the field.

Density If in continuous mode, it is possible to set the density of the dots


per centimeter or per inch. Higher is the density of points, higher is
the marking time and faster the pin wear.
It defines the quality of marking in relation to the marking head set.
Quality Depending on the selected quality it will be possible to get a
marking more or less defined. This will affect the performance of
the machine.

3.14.3 Parameter of the arc field

The marking system software provides two ways to create arcs: the degrees method and
the dots method. To implement an arc field, it is necessary to set certain parameters.
Following are the categories of the settable parameters : arc common parameters,
degrees method parameters, and dots method parameters.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 86 -
Setting page of the parameters of the text field (Degree method)

COMMON PARAMETERS

Mode It defines the marking mode that will be used to mark the field.

Density If in continuous mode, it is possible to fix the density of the points


per inches or centimeters. Higher is the density of points, higher is
the marking time and faster the pin wear.

Quality It defines the quality of marking in relation to the marking head.


Depending on the selected quality it will be possible to get a marking
more or less defined. This will affect the performance of the machine.

DEGREES METHOD

Settable parameters for the degree method

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 87 -
Settable parameters for the degrees method

The center X-Y-arc parameters


Center
identify the position of the center
of the arc within the marking
area. The coordinates are relative
to the point of origin of the
marking area (0,0). Set the
desired coordinates or use the Jog
button.
It indicates the length of radius
Radius
of the circle (in inches or
millimeters, as applicable). The
radius value
defines mathematically the size of
the arc. Ensure the radius doesn’t
exceed the marking area.
Angle The values of the start angle and end angle define where the arc begins and
ends. The arc starting point is the intersection between the initial angle and
the circumference defined by the radius measure set and as
center the center of the angle set. The end point of the arc is the intersection
of the circumference itself with the final angle set. The point 0° corresponds
to 3 o’clock on the dial and counter clockwise increases, up to
maximum of 360°. Set the values of start angle (start angle) and final angle
(end angle) in degrees.
The prepositioning value is used to indicate how to perform the
Prepositioning movement of prepositioning on this field. If set to initial point, the
prepositioning will be done at justification position of the field
otherwise, if set to center, the prepositioning will be made at the
center of the arc.
NOTE
The start angle and end angle determine if the
angle is concave or convex, since the software
runs ALWAYS the arcs with a counter-clockwise
direction from start point
POINTS METHOD

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 88 -
Settable parameters for points method

It is recommended first to define the start- and end-points of the arc, before fixing the arc
opening. The system will also create a more precise arc if the user set the center-point as
much as possible corresponding to the reality.

NOTE
Initial, central and final points MUST not fall on
the same horizontal or vertical line

Start The X- and Y parameters of the stat


point identify the coordinates of the
start point of the arc. The coordinates
are relative to origin point of the
marking area (0,0). Enter the desired
coordinates or use the Jog button. .

►Remember, the marker always


constructs arcs in a counter-clockwise direction from the start point.

The X- and Y parameters of the central


Center point identify the coordinates of the
definition of the arc path inside the
marking area. The coordinates are
relative to the origin point of the
marking area (0,0). Enter the desired
coordinates or use the Jog button
End The X and Y parameters of the final
point identify the ending point of the
arc. The coordinates are relative to the
origin point of the marking area (0,0).
Enter the desired coordinates or use the
Jog button
NOTE
The start angle (start angle) and the final
angle (end angle) determine whether the
angle is concave or convex, since the
software handles ALWAYS arcs with
counter-clockwise direction from the
starting point.

3.14.4 Parameters of the text field on arc

This field allows to create a text string of text along an arc of circumference, combining
the characteristics of the text and the arc. As for the definition of the arc, there are two
methods for the construction of the arc text

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 89 -
Setting pge of parameters of the text on arc

COMMON PARAMETERS

Mode It defines the marking mode that will be used to mark the field.

Density If in continuous mode, it is possible to fix the density of points per


inches or centimeters. Higher is the density of points, higher is the
marking time and faster the pin wear.
It defines the quality of marking in relation to the marking head.
Quality Depending on the selected quality it will be possible to get a
marking more or less defined. This will affect the performance of
the machine

Text It defines the content of the string, which can contain uppercase or
lowercase characters, keyboard symbols, padding and special
commands called FLAG. These commands are introduced by the
percent sign % and followed by letters, each one corresponding to
a command. They serve to insert in the text content values to be
updated such as the date, the time, the shift , the serial number.
Font It defines the character to use in the string display. The characters
change from the ones of default to the custom ones. ( TTF fonts ).

Justification It defines the reference point of the coordinates relative to the field

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 90 -
R / T (Right / Top) - Justification on the top right
R / M (Right / Middle) - Justification in the middle right
R / B (Right / Bottom) - Justification on the bottom right
C / T (Center / Top) - Justification in the upper center
C / M (Center / Middle) - Justification center central
C / B (Center / Bottom) - Justification on the bottom center
L / T (Left / Top) - Justification on the top left
L / M (Left / Middle) - Justification in the center of the left
L / B (Left / Bottom) - Justification on the bottom left

Parameter to select the shape


Shape of the text on current arc.
Settable parameter on
Concave or Convex. Unlike the
arches, which are always
drawn with counter clockwise,
the software manages the arc
text both clockwise and
counter clockwise, in relation
to the parameter Shape / Form
and to the parameters of text
alignment. .

DEGREES METHOD
The X-Y parameters of the arc
Center
center identify the position of the
center of the arc within the
marking area. The coordinates
are calculated referring to the
point of origin of the marking
area (0,0).

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 91 -
Angle
The start angle S defines where the
initial point of the arc will begin
the circular path. The angle start
point will be the intersection point
between initial S / angle and the
circumference where the arc text
is. The 0° reference point is
corresponding to 3 o’clock position
and increases in the counter-
clockwise direction to 360°. Enter
the value of the start – angle.

Radius Enter the value of the radius of the circle (in inches or millimeters,
as applicable). The radius parameter defines the size of the arc.
Ensure the radius doesn’t create an arc that extends outside the
marking window.

POINTS METHOD

It is recommended to define the start- and end-points of the arc, before fixing the arc
opening. The system will create a more precise arc if the user sets the central point as
much as possible corresponding to the reality.
NOTE
The initial, central and ending points must NOT
fall on the same horizontal or vertical line.
The start point defines the positioning of the text string. The centre- and end-points help
to define the circular or arc path, but the text may pass or not through these three points.
It depends on whether the text convex or concave. Additionally, the text may extend
beyond the defined end-point, if the text string is longer than the defined arc.

Initial The X-Y parameters of the starting point identify the coordinates of the start
point of the arc. The coordinates refer to the origin point of the marking area
(0,0). The system will align the field with the X / Y coordinates, depending on
the type of alignment.
Setup the desired coordinates or use the Jog button.

Center The parameters of the central point in X


and in Y identify the coordinates of the
path definition arc within the marking. The
coordinates are referred to the origin point
of the marking area (0,0).
Enter the coordinates directly or use the
Jog button.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 92 -
Finish The X-Y parameters of the central point
identify the end point of the arc. The
coordinates are referred to the origin point
of the marking area (0,0).
Set the coordinates directly or use the Jog
button

Types of Arc text

Consider the following factors when defining the parameters of the Arc Text:

• Increasing the radius arc decreases the text curvature;

• Reducing the radius arc increases the curvature of the text;

• Small adjustments of to the alignment parameters can reposition the text along the
path of the arc. It is recommended to make trials to verify the changes.

• If a arc text is slightly outside the marking window, it is recommended to change


the alignment of the text;

- if the arc text is convex, try to align on the top or to the center;
- if the arc text is concave, try to align to the bottom or to the center.

3.14.5 Parameters of the datamatrix

The datamatrix field allows to encode a text message, according with a two-dimensional
matrix symbol, readable by appropriate machine, and to mark it as part of the message.
The datamatrix field uses an encoding algorithm based on the Data Matrix Library, present
in the system. Different are parameters for defining and formatting the datamatrix
messages.

► the successful reading of the matrix symbols is critically dependent on its marking..
Optimally is that the dots of the matrix symbol should almost touch. A special
relationship between the diameter of the marked dot and the spacing between the
marked dots is necessary.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 93 -
Setting page of datamatrix parameters

Text The Text parameter defines the information to be included in the


matrix symbol. It may include upper- and lowercase characters,
keyboard symbols, blank spaces, and special flag commands. Flag
commands are used to insert in the message the current date, the
time and the serial numbering.
The content of the text string will determine the format selection
(see below). Additionally, the combination of the format and the
length of the text string will determine the geometric shape of the
matrix symbol (square or rectangular).

X, Y The- X and Y coordinates values define position of the field in the


marking area. The coordinates are calculated in relation to the
point of the origin of the area (0,0).and the field will be aligned
according with the setting of its parameter. Set the desired
coordinates or use the Jog button.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 94 -
Justification It defines the point to which the coordinate refer relative to the field.

L/T (Left/Top) – Justification on the top left


L/M (Left/Middle) – Justification in the center Left
L/B (Left/Bottom) – Justification on the bottom
C/T (Center/Top) – Justification on the top in the center
C/M (Center/Middle) – Justification in the middle
C/B (Center/Bottom) – Justification on the bottom in the
center
R/T (Right/Top) – Justification on the top right
R/M (Right/Middle) – Justification in the center right
R/B (Right/Bottom) – Justification on the bottom right

Type The type parameter identifies the type of datamatrix to use. It is


possible to set the standard type or QR type.

DataMatrix QR

Format The format parameter identifies the geometrical shape of the matrix
character. Symbols with squared matrix have the same number of
lines and columns. Symbols with rectangular matrix are built in one
of the 6 default formats
SQUARE equal number of rows and columns

8 X 18 8 rows , 18 columns
8 X 32 8 rows , 32 columns
12 X 26 12 rows, 26 columns
12 X 36 12 rows, 36 columns
16 X 36 16 rows, 36 columns
16 X 48 16 rows, 48 columns

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 95 -
Angle Specify the rotation angle of the symbol relative to the anchor point.
The 0° reference point (no rotation) corresponds to 3 o’clock
position on the dial. When increasing the angle, the field will rotate
counter-clockwise.

The rotation is also depending on the alignment parameters.

Vertical size Enter the dimension (in inches


or millimeters, as applicable).
The parameter of vertical size
allows to set the desired height
of the marked matrix. The
system will automatically
calculate spacing and width of
the symbols
 Note the size parameter
measures the distance
between the centre of the
highest and the centre of
the lowest point.

Space Enter the spacing dimension


(in inches or millimeters as
applicable). The spacing
parameter allows the user to
check the specific spacing of
the dots performed by the
marking head. If the diameter
of the marked dot is known, set
the spacing equal to 125% of
the dot diameter.

Quality It specifies the quality of the marking according with the head set
According with the selected quality, the marking will be more or
less defined. This will affect the machine performances.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 96 -
The parameter controls the marking speed of the matrix field only.
The set speed is relative to the speed of the overall marking of the
Speed field. For example, setting the execution speed of the datamatrix
field to 100% will mark the matrix field at the same speed that is
used for all other fields in the pattern; setting the matrix speed to
50% means to mark the datamatrix field at half speed of the marking
speed of the program. Higher rates will imply faster marking cycles.

Reverse The parameter of reverse execution enabling is used to speed up


execution the execution of the datamatrix field . In normal situation the field
would always be executed line by line from left to right, like this:

Enabling the reverse execution, the datamatrix field will run more
continuously, always line by line but in the opposite direction than
the previous line, like this:

The execution of the datamatrix field depends also on a parameter in the general data of
the software. This parameter will indicate an offset execution of the datamatrix that will
represents of how much the marking head has to move to perform a new row of the
datamatrix. If this parameter is set to 0, the head will move directly to the position of the
execution of the new row of the datamatrix field.

The datamatrix field can be used on laser machine, too. The execution of this field is
different on laser machine. The execution points will be substituted by some squares as
showed here below:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 97 -
Screen with datamatrix on laser machine

For the laser machine it is possible to select the datamatrix filling function. If the
management of font filling is enabled (see section of the general parameters in the
manual ), it will be displayed a button that will allow to set some parameters for the filling
function .

Configuration button of filling parameters

Pushing on this button, a screen will display where it will be possible to set the values of
these parameters.

Configuration screen of filling parameters

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 98 -
Type of marking indicates the type of marking to use for following field. The
settable values are : border, filling or both.

Marking sequence settable only in case of marking type set on both. It indicates
the execution order of the type of marking. The settable values are : border-
>filling (it indicates that the border is executed before the filling) and filling-
>border (it indicates that the filling is executed before the border).

Orientation indicates the orientation to perform for the filling function. The
settable values are: : horizontal, vertical, diagonal and crossed.

Horizontal Vertical Diagonal Crossed

Filling pitch indicates the distance to keep between one filling line and the other.
A low pitch value indicates an higher concentration of the filling lines in the field,
vice versa a high pitch value indicates a low concentration of the filling lines in the
field.

Example of field with high filling pitch

Example of field with low filling pitch

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 99 -
Inclination 1 filling settable only if the type of orientation is set on diagonal or
crossed . It indicates the inclination angle of the filling lines .

Inclination 2 filling settable only if the type of orientation is set on crossed.


It indicates the inclination angle of the secondary lines in the crossed filling.

3.14.6 Parameters of the pause field

It is possible to plan a pause during the marking cycle, including a relative field in the
program. The system will stop marking until it will receive a new marking command or
once past the pause waiting time set in the parameters of the pause field.

Parameters setting page of the pause field

If the waiting time is equal to 0 (zero), the system will wait for a new marking command
to resume the cycle. Otherwise, if the waiting time has a different value from 0, the
marking system will wait for a new command or for the passing of the time set in order to
resume the cycle.

It is possible to set the position to move the marking head during the execution of the
pause field. This procedure allows to customize the behavior during the pause field and
can be useful according with the kind of markings.
Following can be the setting of the pause field:

• NONE: with this position, the marking head will remain the same position where it
was the moment of the execution of the field pause;

• NEXT FIELD : the marking head will place on the starting position of the next field
to the one of pause.

• PARKING : the marking head will be placed on the parking position set for the
current program.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 100
3.14.7 Parameters of Goto field

ATTENTION

With the GoTo command, the marking


head will move. Before confirming the
command, verify to have respected all
safety precautions in clothing and to
have adopted the individual hearing
and sight protections of the operator.
Do not clutter the working area, by
inserting hands or other under the

In the message it is possible to insert the Goto field. When a Goto field has been inserted,
the marking head will move from its current location to the new location which
coordinates are defined by the Goto field. This is useful to overcome obstacles inside the
marking area. No marking is performed with the Goto field-

If the auxiliary axes it will be able to move all axes with the Goto field. The only note
concerns the possibility of simultaneously moving the auxiliary axis set with the axis Y,
which is not possible as the auxiliary axis is switched with the axis Y. However, it is
possible to set priorities in the movements or disable an axis in the Goto field. All this
makes totally customizable the displacements during a marking cycle. The management of
the priorities of the movements can not be set without an auxiliary axis enabled.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 101
X The X parameter defines the X-axis coordinate where the head will
position when receiving the Goto command. The coordinate is
relative to the origin point of the area (0,0). Enter the desired X-axis
coordinate or use Jog button
The Y parameter defines the Y-axis coordinate where the head
Y
position when receiving the Goto command. The coordinate is
relative to the origin point of the area (0,0). Enter the desired Y-axis
coordinate or use the Jog button
Z The Z parameter defines the coordinate on Z axis where the head
will position when receiving the Goto command. The coordinate is
calculated in relation to the origin point of the axis. Set the Z-axis
coordinate or use the Jog button. Settable only in case of Z
enabled.
The T parameter defines the coordinate on Theta axis where the
T
head will position when receiving the Goto command. The
coordinate is calculated in relation to the origin point of the axis. Set
the Theta axis coordinate or use the Jog button. Settable only in
case of Theta enabled.
X1 The X1 parameter defines the coordinate on X1 axis where the head
will position when receiving the Goto command. The coordinate is
calculated in relation to the origin point of the axis. Set the X1-axis
coordinate or use the Jog button. Settable only in case of X1
enabled.
The Y1 parameter defines the coordinate on Y1 axis where the head
Y1 will position when receiving the Goto command. The coordinate is
calculated in relation to the origin point of the axis. Set the X1-axis
coordinate or use the Jog button. Settable only in case of Y1
enabled.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 102
Priority The priority parameter defines the displacements priority in Goto field.
Lower values indicate higher priority in displacements. If two axis are set with the same
priority, they will be managed at the same time. Settable only in case of auviliary axis
enables.

3.14.8 Parameters of the Bitmap image field

This field allows to insert an image in bitmap format (file extension. bmp) in the program.
From the editor environment, it is possible to select one of the images in the memory of
the controller (see in the next chapter how to import images files) and set some
parameters for the representation of the image in the marking area.

When entering a field of bitmap image, please take into account some important
considerations.

First of all, bitmap images must be saved in monochrome format. Each file. bmp, only
the "colored" pixels are marked. For example, let's consider a bitmap of 640x480 pixels,
and, of the total of 307200, only 50000 pixel "colored. " Regardless of the marking size
in mm set in the controller, it will be carried out 50000 marks. Changing the image size,
only the density of the marked dots will be changed.
It 's obvious that in the construction of an image on the PC, a bitmap should be created
in a conscious way. It has no sense to mark a bitmap 640x480 pixels in 2x1mm.

It must be kept in mind that if the density is too high, marking speed is automatically
reduced to ensure the correct timing of the solenoid management, with the effect of a too
much slower marking.

Setting page of image to load

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 103
Setting page of parameters of the bitmap image field

Image The image parameter defines the image file to represent in the
marking area. The image file is selectable from the files stored in
the memory of the controller.
X, Y The X- and Y-coordinates values define the position where the field
will be placed inside the marking area. The coordinates are relative
to the origin point of the marking area (0,0) and the field will be
aligned based on the setting of the relative parameter. Enter the
desired coordinates or use the Jog button

Justification Defines the reference point of the coordinates relative to the


field

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 104
L / T (Left / Top) - Justification on top left
L / M (Left / Middle) - Justification in the center of the left
L / B (Left / Bottom) - Justification in the lower left
C / T (Center / Top) - Justification in the upper center
C / M (Center / Middle) - Justification in the center
C / B (Center / Bottom) - Justification in the bottom center
R / T (Right / Top) - Justification in the upper right
R / M (Right / Middle) - Justification in the center right
R / B (Right / Bottom) - Justification in the bottom right

Angle Specify the angle of rotation of the image , relative to the anchor
point. The reference point of 0 ° (no rotation) is corresponding to 3
o'clock on the dial. Increasing the angle, the field will rotate
counterclockwise. The rotation depends also on the slignment
parameters

Width The width parameter defines the width in millimeters of the image
that will be represented on the marking area. Changing this
parameter, the density of the points to be marked on the object will
be modified.

Height It defines the height in millimeters of the image that will


represented in the marking area. Changing this parameter, the
density of the points to be marked on the object will be modified.

Quality It defines the marking quality according with the head set.
Depending on the selected quality it will possible to obtain a more
or less defined marking. This will affect the performance of the
machine.

3.14.9 Parameters of the comment field

It is possible to program a comment during marking, including a field relative to the


program. The system will stop marking, as for the pause field, but the cycle will resume
only pressing the button OK in the messages window with the indication of the comment
field.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 105
Setting page of the parameters of the comment field

Comment The parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the messages


window that will appear in the comment field during the marking
cycle.

3.14.10 Parameters of DXF field

This field allows to insert a DXF drawing in DXF format (file extension. dxf) in the
program. From the editor environment, it is possible to select one of the drawings present
in the memory of the controller (see in the next chapter how to import drawings files) and
set some parameters for the representation of the drawing in the marking are

Setting page of DXF drawing to represent

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 106
Setting page of the parameters of the DXF drawing

DXF The DXF parameter defines the drawing file to represent in the
marking area. The drawing file is selectable from the files stored in
the memory of the controller

X, Y The X- and Y- coordinates values define the position of the field


inside the marking area. The coordinates are relative to the origin
point of the area (0,0) and the field will be aligned according with
the setting of the relative parameter. Enter the desired coordinates
or use the Jog button.

Justification It defines the reference point of the coordinates relative to the


field

L/T (Left/Top) – Justification on the top left


L/M (Left/Middle) – Justification in the centre left
L/B (Left/Bottom) – Justification on the bottom left
C/T (Center/Top) – Justification on the top in the centre
C/M (Center/Middle) – Justification in the centre
C/B (Center/Bottom) – Justification on the bottom in the centre

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 107
R/T (Right/Top) – Justification on the top right
R/M (Right/Middle) – Justification in the centre right
R/B (Right/Bottom) – Justification on the bottom right

Angle Specify the DXF angle of rotation, relative to the anchor point. The
reference point of 0 ° (no rotation) is corresponding to 3 o'clock on
the dial. Increasing the angle, the field will rotate counterclockwise.
The rotation depends also on the justification parameters

Scale ratio Defines the scaling factor (in percentage) used to represent the
drawing in the marking area . A scale factor of 100% will lead to the
representation of the design in its real scale.
Mode Defines the marking mode that will be used for the execution of the
current field.

Density If in continuous mode, it is possible to set the density of dots ( per


centimeter o per inch). Increasing the density of dots, the time of
marking will be higher with a consequent fast pin wear.
Quality It defines the marking quality according with the head set.
Depending on the selected quality it will be possible to have a more
or less defined marking. This will affect the performance of the
machine.

3.14.11 Parameters of automation field

The automation field serves to make possible the creation of external and customized
logics during the execution of a marking cycle. It is possible to consider the automation
field as a kind of field of the program that allows to manage the external logic to the
processing done by the controller AC500. At the moment the the field pause allows to set
the value of a digital output flow out of the unit (see chapter on I / O signals contained in
this manual) of course only if this output is free and therefore not used by the software.

In case of the normal configuration of the machine three digital outputs can be used, the
number 4, the number 5 and number 6 (which are respectively the output signals on pin
18, 19 and 20) to take out signals from the controller during a cycle marking. The
operation that cannot be performed on an output is simply the status setting, ie whether
to enable (ON) or disable (OFF) the output.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 108
As already mentioned, the automation field allows to use only free outputs and that
therefore are not used by the software of the controller. For this reason it is important to
keep in mind that outputs 5 and 6 are already used by the software in the event of
machine ALEA and therefore in this configuration it will not be able to use them in the
automation field..

Parameters setting page of the automation field

ID Defines the numerical index of the output to use for the automation
field. This window will filter the outputs that can not be used.

Condition Defines the ON / OFF to set at the selected output for the
automation field.

In marking phase, when the software will handle an automation field, the logic inserted in
the programming phase of the field will be processed.

NOTICE
The software does not handle any kind of
control on these outputs, the operator will have
to set the correct values of the status at the
end or the beginning of the cycle.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 109
3.15 Flag commands

The system allows to insert “flag” commands in the text string in order to mark in dynamic
data such as day and time in different formats. Some“ flag” commands allow to insert also
serial numbers and encoded data in the message to mark, according to a table defined by
the operator.

The “ flag” commands consist of :

% - percentage –
Letter - for each special command – uppercase or lowercase

Table 3-1. “flag” messages


FLAG DATA INSERTED INTO MESSAGE FOR PRINTING
%A Abbreviated Weekday (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun)
%B Abbreviated Month (Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec)
%C Date and Time (MM/DD/YY HH:MM)
%D Day of the Month (01 - 31)
%d Day code
%E Year Code (see Coded Information)
%F Single Character Check Digit for PS-OCR (see Error Checking)
%G Double Character Check Digit for PS-OCR (see Error Checking)
%H Hour of the Day (00 - 23)
%I Hour of the Day (00 - 12)
%J Julian Day of the Year (001 - 366)
%K Month Code (1 - 9, O, N, D)
%L Last Digit of the Year (0 - 9)
%M Month (01 - 12)
%N Minutes of the Hour (00 – 59)
%#O Serial Number (see Serial Numbers)
%#o Serial Number (see Serial Numbers)
%P AM or PM
%#Q Insert text from the Query Table
%#q Inserts title from the Query Table
%R Week Number (01 - 53) [ week 01 is week containing January 1]
%r Week Number (01 - 53) [ week 01 is week containing first Thursday of new year ]
%#S Pattern Serial Number
%#s Pattern Serial Number (
%T Time (HH:MM)
%t Field from CSV file
%U User Month Code (see Coded Information)
%#V Variable Text
%#v Variable Text
%W Weekday (where: 1 = Sunday... 7 = Saturday)
%w Weekday (where: 1 = Monday... 7 = Sunday)
%X Date (MM/DD/YY)
%Y Year (00 - 99)
%Z User Shift Code (see Coded Information)
%% Insert the percent (%) in the string
%#= Insert the text of the specified field (#) in the current string
%#@ Insert the specified ASCII character (#) in the current string

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 110
General Information
The total number of characters in a string is influenced by the characters inserted by the “
flag” commands.

Time and Date Insertion


There are different “ flags” commands corresponding to different formats of date and
time. The system clock is the source of the date and time information.

Error Checking
“Flag” commands can be used to perform an error checking operation , when the program
is red using an OCR optical character reader. The “flag” check command may refer to
one or two characters at the end of the string field. The check characters are calculated by
a system based on the hexadecimal sum of the characters inserted in the text string. The
final check character is then inserted in the program. The PS-OCR can then read the
string, perform its own checksum calculation, and verify that the check characters in the
program match the sum results. The “flag” commands %F and %G, if used, must be
placed at the end of the text string. The %F flag inserts a single check character at the
end of the program. The %G flag inserts two check characters at the end of the message.
The single check digit should be used only when space constraints the use of two check
characters.

Coded Information
Certain “flag” commands allow to define codes that represent the current year, month, or
work shift.

Text entered by the operator


The system provides two ways to enter data into a message: query and variable text.
- Query To insert data common to several programs
- Variable text To insert data related to a field

The “ flag” commands referred to the text variables can be part of a field or constitute a
separate field .
The settable commands can be in two formats : %#V or %#v . In particular:

# is a value that defines the maximum number of characters . Field with


variable text fields can have up to 50 characters. (Eg,%% 50V or% 50v)
If this data is omitted the field will have a length variable to the data set.
V (uppercase). The field will be filled with blanks if the operator enters fewer
fields that the ones expected from the variable .
v (lowercase).The field WILL NOT be filled with blanks if the operator enters
fewer fields than the ones expected from the variable.

Example

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 111
Field Operator Data Marking
SAMPLE_%5VABC 12345 SAMPLE_12345ABC
SAMPLE_%5VABC 123 SAMPLE_123 ABC
SAMPLE_%5vABC 12345 SAMPLE_12345ABC
SAMPLE_%5vABC 123 SAMPLE_123ABC

To insert a variable text into a text, it is necessary:

1. Create a field in the program allowing the text inserting;

2. Enter the flag command recalling the variable text in the text parameter of the
field;

3. The button - nearby the text box – will be enabled. Clicking on this
button, it is possible to enter the setting window of the variable text data.

Setting window of variable text data

4. Enter the variable and select if enable/disable the automatic cleaning. If it will be
enabled, parameters, the text of the variable will be automatically erased at the
end of the marking. In case the automatic cleaning will be disabled, the variable
text will not be modified until the operator makes a change on the variable.

5. Save the pattern using the special button present in the editor environment

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 112
Serial numbers

The system provides two types of serial numbers:

Omni Serial Numbers. Serial numbers common to several programs;


Pattern Serial Numbers. Serial number related to a single field;

The “ flag” command of serial number can be placed inside a text string or can be part of
a separate text.

Omni serial number may be given by following formats: %#O, %O, %#o, or
%o
Pattern serial number may be given by following formats: %#S, %S, %#s, or
%s

In particular :
% It introduces the flag command.

# From 1 to 9 to define of how many digits is the serial number composed,


that the system will fill of spaces or zeros in front of the unit, depending on
the selected flag command
S/O uppercase – it defines the kind of serial numbering. The system will mark
some zeros in front of the unit an integer value from 1 to 9 is specified.
s/o lowercase – it defines the kind of serial numbering. The system will leave
some spaces in front of the unit if an integer value from 1 to 9 is specified.

For example, if the text string is set as follows:

ABC%4SABC

In marking it will be: ABC0001ABC

where the 4 digits of the serial number has been set at command flag level. It is
recommended to set correctly both the lower and upper levels of the serial number and
the flag command. Otherwise it could happen that the parameters will reach the number
99999, while the serial number will consider the marking of 4 digits only. Therefore once
marked:

ABC9999ABC

The result will be:

ACC0000ABC

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 113
because the serial number has been set at 4 and not at 5 digits. So the number 1 of
10000 is truncated

Next table allows to consider the various cases of serial number marking depending on
the flag command set.

To enter a variable text in a text it is necessary:

1. Create a field in the program that allow the text inserting;

2. To enter the flag command recalling the serial number in the field text parameter.

3. Save the program using the appropriate button present in the editor environment

3.16 Interaction and positioning through jog environment

It is possible to use the Jog environment to define a location within the marking area.
Whenever the system displays a screen that allows to set some coordinates, the Job
button will be enabled..

Button to recall the jog environment

NOTE
The head must be online to be able to position
the field using the jog command.

To position a field trough the jog button:

1. Click on the Jog button;

2. From the Jog environment, position the head in the desired place;

3. Press on the acquisition button to confirm .

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 114
3.17 Modify the fields program from preview

From the preview of the program in the editor environment, it is possible to reposition or
resize the fields. In case of selection of a field in the preview, simply touching the screen
next to the field itself, it will be possible to move the field in the marking area for an easy
positioning of the fields of the program.

Editor screen with preview display

Once selected the field to modify, these are the allowed operations:

- Moving of the field within the working area;


- Resizing of the field in relation to an angle of the rectangle in which the field is entered.

During a displacement field operation, the current real quote of the field is displayed.

It is possible to edit a displacement or resizing operation of the field pressing the

button

NOTE
After a moving or resizing operation of the
preview, in case of return into a programming
environment or performance of any other
operation not related to the change from
preview, it will no more possible to edit the
operations previously performed.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 115
NOTE
The resizing operation of a field is not possible
on the arc fields, text on arc , in the fields that
contain an angle of rotation and in the fields
that cannot be displayed (GOTO, Commentary,
etc.).

3.18 Modify a program

The software provides many possibilities for managing the programs once defined and
stored in the controller. It is possible to load a program, test it, create a duplicate or
delete it.

3.18.1 Testing a program

It is possible to test a program to verify that all fields are inside the marking area. The
system examines each field in the order they have been defined. In case of test errors,
the system will display the error encountered with a series of messages:

To test a pattern, it is necessary:

1. Load the pattern to be tested;

2. From Editor, press the compilation button ;

3. A messages window will be displayed showing result of the compilation;

4. If an error message is displayed, verify and edit the wrong field so that it will be
placed within the marking area. Relaunch the compilation.

3.18.2 Saving a program

New patterns or changes to the ones already existing are not stored in controller memory
until they have been saved. The saving function allows to copy programs and save them
with a different name.
NOTE
Before loading any new pattern, the program in
use must be saved, otherwise there could be
the risk of losing any changes made. The work
must be saved from time to time to avoid any
data losing.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 116
To save a pattern, it is necessary:

1. From the programs editor environment, ensure to have inserted a name to the
current program;

2. Press the save button;

3. If in the controller memory already exists a program with the same name, it will be
requested whether the existing one must be overwritten.

3.18.3 Changing program parameters

Certain parameters and options are stored in the program. The program parameters
affect only the current program. The parameters may be defined both when the pattern
is created and even during any modification phase.

3.18.4 Changing field parameters

Each field in a program is defined by a variety of parameters that control its location,
aspect and content. It is possible to make changes whenever necessary.

3.18.5 Changing pattern fields

It is possible to insert, modify, delete in every field in the pattern. You can also cut, copy
and paste a field in the pattern. These operations are accessible through the buttons on
the side of the field table in the editor.

3.19 File management

The user with operational level set to Supervisor, Distributor or Manufacturer can enter
the files management environment (programs, bitmap images , dxf drawings , TTF and
custom fonts, CSV files and virtual keyboards) present and stored into the memory of the
controller. From this environment it is possible to import, export, delete, copy or rename
files stored into the memory of the controller.

It is possible to enter the files management environment as follows:

1. From the Main Menu, press the button to enter the auxiliary functions of the software

2. From the auxiliary functions menu press the button file management

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 117
In this environment it will be possible to enter the management of the different files types
managed by the software.

Screen of file management environment

For each type of file, following operation will be possible.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 118
1.
4.

5.

6.

7.
2.

8.
3.

9.

Screen of programs management

1. Table of the files existing in the memory of the controller


2. Filter settable on the display of the files listed in the table
3. Buttons for selecting/deselecting all files in the table
4. Button for erasing the selected files if the table
5. Button for copying the selected file
6. Button for re-naming the selected file
7. Button for exporting the selected file on the USB key
8. Button for importing one or more files from the USB key
9. Button to exit the programs management environment

NOTE
The operations of deleting or renaming a
bitmap image, a dxf drawing or a TTF font can
cause problems in the execution of these
programs, if they contained any reference to
one of these files.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 119
3.20 Management of controller network

The software allows to configure and use a controllers network so that they can share
information about marking data via Ethernet. In particular these controllers can mark
program serial numbers or omni sequentially, as these data were managed by a single
controller. In fact, the network controller works in such a way that information about serial
numbers to be marked are stored and managed by a single controller (called master)
and all other controllers will only require the serial number to be marked at the time of
the cycle start (slave controllers ). To configure the network settings of the controller see
the appropriate section in this manual.

A controllers network must absolutely have a master controller but can have an indefinite
number of slave controllers. The same network can have several masters (that cannot
communicate with each other) and every master can have one or more controllers
connected. This can allow a certain flexibility on a network management as it can be set
a group of controllers that works on a certain group of data and another group working on
others. Possible configurations and uses are different and totally customizable according
with the needs.

Looking in detail at the communication between master and slave , the master does not
communicate with any controller of his own but waits to receive any communication from
outside ( server function). Conversely, at the startup the slave controller will attempt to
connect to the master controller set, until the connection will not be successful ( function
from client).
Once the connection request will be received by the master controller, the connection
between the two controllers will open and will begin the exchange of information between
the two. The slave controller will have the task of making requests and the master
controller will reply consequently.

The slave controller will continuously send an ALIVE package to communicate to the
master controller that the unit is alive and that the communication should therefore be
kept open. If the master will not receive the package of ALIVE within a certain time
(timeout), this will consider the slave controller as not connected and will then close the
connection. Considering that all communication is based on a system of request and
response between the slave and the master, if the slave controller does not receive the
confirmation of the package ALIVE from master, it will go in timeout and will close the
communication with the master.

When the slave unit will have to run a program containing serial numbers, it will send a
request to the master unit. Once received this request, the master controller will analyze
the data to mark and will send them to the slave controller that has sent such a request.
At the end of the running cycle, the slave controller will send to the master the result of
the cycle just ran: if this is successful , the data sent by the master will be considered as
executed and then the relative serial counter will be incremented, on the contrary if the
end result is negative (abort, error, etc.) the serial numbers sent to the slave controller
will be reused for a new request.
The same will happen even if a slave controller holding data will disconnect.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 120
MASTER

SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE

To perform a network cycle on slave controller it is necessary that: :

• the controller is connected to the master;

• the loaded program contains omni or program serial numbers;

• the loaded program is the same as the one loaded on the master controller.

If a slave is configured and associated with a master, it can still continue running
programs that do not contain serial numbers without passing from network. This way on
the slave unit it is not allowed the access to the settings of the program serial numbers
and omni since they must be managed by the master controller.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 121
Working screen with serial number management from network on slave

In the program preview it will be displayed the flag relating to the field that will be
marked and not the actual value, since the value of the serial to mark will be required at
the cycle start (same management at master side).

Working screen with cycle execution with serial number from network

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 122
3.21 No repetitiveness check

In the programs editor, in case of selection of TEXT, ARC TEXT or DATAMATRIX, it will be
possible to display the selection itself for the check of no marking repetitiveness. This
function will be enabled only after purchasing it from the store and if the concerning
general parameter is enabled.
For further information check the chapter concerning the software general parameters.

Screen for the no repetitiveness check

In the advanced sections it will be possible to enable the check for the selected field. This
control can be enabled only for a single field of the program.
In case of the management enabling on multiple fields, it will be displayed an error
message at the start of a marking cycle.

Enabling this check, at the end of a marking, the software will save in the memory the
information of the textual content of the field just marked.
At the beginning of each marking, if the current program contains a field with the no-
repetitiveness check enabled, it will be made a check to see whether the content of the
field was already marked previously; in this case it will be displayed a message notifying to
the user the possibility to mark the field again or not.

From the backup management environment, it will be possible to delete the history file of
the fields that have been marked as non-repeatable.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 123
CHAPTER 4
System configuration

Parameters and options that control the system configuration are universally valid and
applied during all system operations. Unlike some parameters of the fields stored in the
program definition that are specific to that particular program, the system parameters are
common to all patterns and to all marking operations. This section presents the system
parameters and the operations to act on them: .

 Define the Password  Set the time/date

 Define the text query  Set the unit of measure

 Define the Omni serial number  Set the startup parameters

 Define the shift codes  Set the host communications

 Define the day codes  Enable the remote pattern selection

 Define the months codes  Create the system backup

 Define the years codes  Software upgrade

 Set the parameters of the marking head  Display of the marking history

 Create and manage the machines


database

4.1 Accessing system parameters

The software must be put to Manufacturer level to change any parameter or system
configuration. Some settings can be changed also by the Distributor level and in lower
part by the Supervisor level.

1. From the main menu, set the Manufacturer operative level (or Supervisor or,
Distributor but knowing that NOT all the parameters are editable)

• If the operative level is protected by password, it will be necessary to type it


into the appropriate screen.

2. Enter the auxiliary function environment.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 124
4.2 Defining Omni serial number

The Omni Serial Number allows to continue the number sequence throughout the
marking of several patterns. Unlike the program serial numbers , which parameters are
stored in their pattern definitions, the Omni serial number is stored in permanent memory,
and this value can be used in all the programs containing the flag command “%O”. In
case of setting of the increment of the serial number greater than zero (> 0), the serial
number Omni automatically resets to the lower limit when the upper limit is reached.
Conversely, if the increase of the serial number is less than zero (> 0), the Omni serial
number automatically resets itself to the upper limit value when the lower limit has been
reached.
As option, the Omni serial number can be program so that it resets at a certain time of
the day, settable in the parameters.
The setting of the the serial number is possible also to the Supervisor and Distributor
users.

To set the Omni serial number:

a. From the auxiliary functions screen , press the setup user settings button;

User setup button

b. It will be displayed a screen showing the possible user parameters that can be edit;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 125
Configuration screen user parameters

To modify the serial number parameters, press the button “Omni serial number”

Omni serial number button

c. A new screen will be displayed , here it will be possible to set the parameters of the
Omni serial number.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 126
a. c.

b.
d.

Configuration screen of the Omni serial number parameters

a. In this window it will be possible to set the mode of use of the serial number:

- Increase mode
Parameter indicating the increase mode of the serial number

• PATTERN
Increase mode according with the program. The serial number will be
increased of the value set as increase only at the end of the program
execution.

FIELD
Increase mode according with the field of the program. The serial number
will be increased of the value set as increase only at the end of a filed
using the serial number.

- Reset mode
Parameter indicating the reset mode to use and the corresponding enabling
for the Omni serial number. The software also allows to configure the reset
type to be used (by time, by day, etc.) and, according to the different
selected mode, it is possible to enter the appropriate values.

• HOUR
It allows to set the reset time of the omni serial number. For example, if
the reset time is at 02:00, after recognizing that time has passed , the
software will reset the omni serial number.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 127
• DAY
It allows to set the reset day of the week of the omni serial number. For
example, if Monday is set as reset day, after recognizing that day has
passed, the software will reset the omni serial number.

• DATE
It allows to set the day of a reset month of the omni serial number. For
example, if the reset date is the 15 of the month, after recognizing that
that date has passed, the software will reset the omni serial number. If
the setting date is 31 of the month, in the months with less days, it will
be considered the last valid day of the month.

• SHIFT
It allows to set the reset shift of the omni serial number. For example, if
second shift is ser as reset, after recognizing that shift has passed, the
software will reset the omni serial number.

b. In this window it will be possible to set the current value of the serial number and the
minimum and maximum values where the serial value will be arranged. The current
value must be between the minimum and the maximum value set. In addition, the
minimum value set must be less than the maximum value.

In case of setting of the increase of the positive serial number (> 0), the serial number
will be reset to the minimum limit set. If the increase of the serial number is negative,
the serial number will be reset to the maximum limit set.

c. In this window it is possible to set the necessary parameters for the management of
the repetitions numbers of the serial number.

- Current value
Parameter indicating the current number of the repetitions performed.

- Number of repetitions
Parameter indicating how many repetitions have to be executed of the
current serial number.

These two values are used to determine how many times the system must
mark the current serial number. The current value of the number of
repetitions indicates how many times it has already been executed. When
this value reaches the number of repetitions set, the serial number will be
ncremented ( according with the settings).

If the number of repetitions is left at 0 (zero) this function will not be used.

When using the number of repetitions of the serial number, in case of cycle
abort, it will be used the management specified in the general parameter
"Abort management for serial number repetitions " (see section Setting of
the general parameters in the software).

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 128
d. In this window it is possible to set the necessary parameters for the management of
the alphanumeric values inside the serial number.

Number of digits
Parameter that indicates how many alphanumeric digits are to be managed
inside the serial number. If the number of digits value is 0, the parameters
of the alphanumeric values will not be enabled.

- Position of the serial number


Parameter that indicates where to position the alphanumeric digits inside the
serial number.

 BEGINNING
Positioning of the alphanumeric digits at the beginning of the serial
number.

In this case, the management of the increase of the serial value and the
controls on the maximum values will be modified and referred also to the
values of alpha characters. In this case:

If the serial value is “A101”, where “A” is the alphanumeric value, when
increasing, if the numeric value will reach the maximum value set in the
serial value parameter, the numeric value will be set equal to the
minimum value and the alphanumeric value will be incremented (or
decremented) by one digit. For example:

Minimum value = 10
Numeric maximum value = 101
Current numeric value = 101
Increase = +1

Alphanumeric value = “A”

The result of the incremented value “A101” will be “B10”.

In this case, the controls on the serial number limit mode will be referred
to the maximum values of the alphanumeric value.

• END
Positioning of the alphanumeric digits at the end of the serial number.

In this case, the management of the increase of the serial number and
the controls on the maximum values will be modified and referred even to
the values of the alphanumeric digits. In this case:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 129
In case of serial value “101A”, where “A” is the alphanumeric value, when
increasing, the alphanumeric value will be increased (or decreased) by
one digit. For instance:

Minimum value = 10
Numeric maximum value = 101
Current numeric value = 101
Increase = +1

Alphanumeric value = “A”

The result of the serial value “101A increased will be 101B.

- General parameters of the alphanumeric digits


General parameters to set the current value, the minimum and the maximum
value of the alphanumeric digits.

d. Once set the parameters, exit to save the changes.

4.3 Definition of the shift codes

The Flag command %Z concerning the shift code allows to insert in the marking program
a designation code that states which working shift is active at the moment of the marking.
When the system encounters one of these command, basing on its internal clock, it will
mark the character that has been defined in the table and that is corresponding to one of
the three working shifts. In the shift table the user can insert any single character next to
a working shift. In the working shift table the user must insert both the beginning and
the ending time each shift. It is also possible to view a counter of the number of the
programs run in every working shift.
At the end of each program the counter of the current shift will be incremented
The setting of the serial number is also possible to the users Supervisor and Distributor.

Example. It is possible to define the shift table as “FST” (representing First, Second,
Third). If the program containing the flag of the ahift code is marked in correspondence of
the 1st shift, the system will automatically inserts the letter “F” into the pattern wherever a
Shift flag (%Z) exists.

Consideration #1: If the 3rd shift starts at or after midnight (e.g., 00:00. to 08:00)
the operator should set the FST table since, at midnight, the first working shift will
start.

Consideration #2: in case of less than three work shifts, the table must be set to
ignore the missing shifts. For example, if the shifts are two, set the table to FSS (first,
second, second) so that in correspondence of the first shift, it will mark F, and S for all
others.

To configure the shift codes:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 130
1.From the auxiliary functions screen, press the setup user button;

Setup user button

2.A screen with the possible editable user parameters will be displayed;

Configuration screen of the user parameters

To modify the shift code parameters, press the button “shift code”.

Shift codes button

3. It will be possible to insert the setting parameters of the shift code in a new
screen.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 131
Setting screen of the shift codes parameters

In this screen it will be possible to enter the beginning and the end times of the
three shifts and the code associated to each one of them.
The beginning shift fields cannot be changed because they are calculated based on
the ending time of the next shift. The change of the ending time of the third shift
will modify the beginning time of the first shift.
It is possible to display near each shift set the number of the programs run in the
timeslot of that shift. The counters of the repetitions number of the programs can
be reset both manually, by pressing the RESET button placed alongside its counter,
and automatically at the beginning of each shift, enabling the check at the bottom
of the window.

4.Once set the desired parameters, exit to save the changes.

4.4 Definition of the day codes

It is possible to insert 31 variables, corresponding to 31 days of a month. If in the field to


mark is present the command flag %d, it will be marked the letter corresponding to the
current day. For example, after setting the table of days with
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQESRUVWXYZ12345, if the current day is 3, marking flag %d it will
be marked the letter C since it is the third letter set and the third day of the month. The
setting of the code of the day is possible also to the users with Supervisor and Distributor

To configure the code of the day:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, press the user setup settings button;

Setup user button

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 132
2. A screen with show the possible editable user parameters;

Configuration screen of user parameters

To modify the parameters of the code of the days, press the button "Days code”.

Days code button

3. A new screen where to insert the setting parameters of the days code will be
displayed.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 133
Setting screen of the parameters of the days code

In this screen it will be possible to enter the code associated with each day of
the month.

Once set the parameters desired, exit to save the changes.

4.5 Definition of the month codes

It is possible to insert 12 variables, corresponding to 12 months of the year. If in the field


to mark is present the command flag %U, it will be marked the letter corresponding to
the current month. For example, after setting the table of the months with ABCDEFGHIJKL
if the current month is March, marking the flag %U the letter C will be marked since it is
the third letter set and the third month of the year. The setting of the code of the month
is possible also for the users with Supervisor and Distributor .

To configure the month code:

1.From the auxiliary functions screen, press the setup user settings button;

Setp user button

2. A screen with the possible editable user parameters will be displayed;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 134
Configuration screen of the user parameters

To modify the parameters of the months code, press the “month codes” button.

Months code button

3.It will be displayed a new screen where it will be possible to enter the setting
parameters of the months code

Setting screen of the months codes parameters

In this screen it will be possible to enter the code associated to each month of the
year.

4.Once set the parameters desired, exit to save the changes.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 135
4.6 Definition of the year codes

It is possible to insert 10 variables, corresponding to final digit of the year from 0 to 9. If


in the field to mark is present the command flag %E, it will be marked the letter
corresponding to the current year. For example, after setting the table of the year with
ABCDEFGHIJ if the current year is 2010, marking the flag %E the letter A will be marked
since it is the first letter and 0 is the final digit of the year.
The setting of the code of the year is possible also to the users with Supervisor and
Distributor .

To configure the year code:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, press the setup user settings button;

Setup user button

2. A screen with the possible editable user parameters will be displayed;

Configuration screen of the user parameters

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 136
To change the years code settings, press the “years code” button;

Year code button

3. A new screen where to insert the setting parameters of the years codes will be
displayed.

Parameters setting screen of the year codes

In this screen it will be possible to enter the code associated to each year.

4. Once set the desired parameters, exit to save the changes.

NOTE
THE FIRST CHARACTER SET IS THE FIRST
YEAR OF THE DECADE ( 0 ).

4.7 Definition of a text query

The parameters of a text query give the user the opportunity to operate on different
strings of the program fields simultaneously. To activate this option, it is necessary that
in one or more text strings is included one of the following flag commands %Q or %q.
The command flag refers to a "table" of data prepared by the operator. For each
implemented text query it is possible to set two values: a title and a text. The two
commands% Q and% q recall one of the two specific values of the query

%Q title of the text query

%q text of the text query

The setting of the the text query is also possible to the users Supervisor and Distributor .

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 137
The software will display a screen with the setting query table.

Table of query settings

Each row of the table represents a query to which the two values of title and text are
associated . Pushing one of the two cells of the table it will be possible to change the
corresponding value of the query.

It is possible to insert enter a new query using button


and delete the selected query with the button.

4.8 General parameters setting

The software allows to configure the marking system based on the mechanical
characteristics of the machine. There are also general configuration parameters of the
software to configure the system according with particular user’s exigencies or
preferences.

In the software there is a section for configuring all these parameters concerning the
system or software in general. These include for example the size and location of the
marking area, the enabling of the simulation of the machine, the management of the
password for the three levels of Supervisor, Distributor and Manufacturer and other
parameters that will be explained in this section.

To configure the general parameters of the system it is necessary to be as distributor or


manufacturer user, as the data editing operations to perform are extremely delicate and

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 138
require special attention while inserting these values. Some general parameters can be set
also by the Supervisor user level.

To configure the general parameters:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, press the system setup settings button;

System setup button

2. A screen with the possible editable user parameters will be displayed;

Configuration screen of the system parameters

To change the general parameters, push the button of general data.

General Data button

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 139
3. A new screen will be displayed, here it will be possible to enter the general software
parameters.

Table for insertion of the general parameters

In this screen it will be possible to enter the general parameters of the software.
The left column contains the descriptions of the parameters, while in the right
column are indicated the values of the parameters.
Values can be of two types: numerical or at multiple choice. In the numerical values
it is required to enter a number (settable from the numeric keypad), while in the
values at multiple choice it is required the selection of one of the proposed values in
the drop-down menu that appears by pressing the cell with the value.

4. Once set the desired parameters, exit to save the changes.

Below a brief description of the general parameters in the table:

Parameter Description
Indicates the location of the working area than the X axis
The value is referred to the absolute minimum quote of the
1 X position working area X axis.

Numeric value
Indicates the dimension of the working area than X axis.
2 X dimension working area
Numeric value
Indicates the location of the working area than the X axis
The value is referred to the absolute minimum quote of the
3 Y position working area Y axis.

Numeric value

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 140
Indicates the dimension of the working area than the Y axis.
4 Y dimension working area
Numeric value
Indicates whether to enable the machine simulation . In this
mode it will be possible to move the axes, run marking
cycles and see the behavior of the software without
controlling the machine. It is possible to run the software in
5 Machine simulation
simulation mode also unplugging the controller from the
machine.

Choice (NO - YES).


Indicates the number of repetitions to be performed in a
marking cycle. If the number of repetitions is greater than
zero, at the end of the marking cycle, the same pattern will
6 Repetitions cycle number be marked for the set numberof repetitions.
Available also to the Supervisor

Numeric value
Indicates the management to use at the beginning of a
marking cycle. If set on none, at the beginning the marking
head will proceed with the normal execution. If set on
homing, at the beginning the marking head will move first to
7 Cycle beginning management the homing position, then it will start with the normal
execution.
Data settable also from supervisor level.

Choice value (NONE –HOMING).


Indicates what to do at the end of the marking cycle. If set
just to parking, at the end of the marking the head will
return to the park position. If it is set to parking and homing,
at the end of the marking the head will go first to the
8 End cycle management
parking position and then to homing
Available also to the Supervisor

Selection (PARK – PARK…HOMING).


Indicates the timeout (in seconds) within which to calibrate
the axes. If the timeout setting is reached , the program will
9 Setting timeout display an alert box on the screen

Numeric value
Indicates the password to access the distributor operational
level.
10 Supervisor level password If set to zero, the system will require no password

Numeric value
Indicates the password to access the manufacturer
operational level.
Visible only to Manufacturer user.
11 Distributor level password
If set to zero, the system will require no password

Numeric value
Indicates the unit of measure that the system uses to define
the coordinates of the axes and all other linear
measurements
12 Measure unit
Available also to the Supervisor

Choice (Millimeters - Inches)


Indicates the offset of datamatrix execution. The offset
13 Offset datamatrix execution indicates of how much the X axis has to move than the
beginning of the datamatrix field.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 141
Numeric value
Indicates whether to enable the management of the logic
signals. For more information see the relative section of this
14 Enable logic signals
manual.
Choice (NO - YES)
Indicates which features associate to the signal of the logic
signals SEL_3. For more information see the relative section
15 Function signal SEL_3 of this manual

Choice (Selection – Online)


Indicates whether to enable the automatic switching on of
the controller at the software startup . If this feature is
disabled the controller will remain off until you press the
16 Automatic startup appropriate power button on the front of the controller
Available also to the Supervisor

Choice (NO - YES)


Indicates whether to enable the Fieldbus protocols
management.This parameters will be disabled if the
management has not been buyed from AC500 Store
17 Fieldbus enabling environment
Available also to the Supervisor

Choice (NO - YES)


Indicates the speed of the axis to use during the tests in the
working area
18 Speed test working area
Numeric value
Indicates the machine type connected to the controller
19 Machine type
Choice (XY – SCARA – Laser- Fast Cartesian).
Indicates the length of the internal arm in the SCARA head
20 SCARA internal arm length
Numeric value
Indicates the length of the external arm in the SCARA head
21 SCARA external arm length
Numeric value
Indicates the X Cartesian position of FULCRUM of the internal
arm relative to marking area
22 Fulcrum SCARA X Position
Numerical value
Indicates the Y Cartesian position of FULCRUM of the internal
arm relative to the the marking area
23 Fulcrum SCARA Y Position
Numerical value
Indicates the cartesian location to position the marking head,
in case of machine SCARA, at the online of the system. This
24 SCARA position X online position must be included in the working area of the machine.

Numeric value.
Indicates the cartesian location to position the marking head,
in case of machine SCARA, at the online of the system. This
position must be included in the working area of the machine.
25 SCARA position Y online
Numeric value

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 142
Indicates the maximum value of the laser frequency. Only for
LASER frequency maximum
laser machines.
26 value
Numeric value
Indicates the maximum value of the laser tension. Only for
laser machines.
27 LASER tension maximum value
Numeric value
Indicates the value of the duty cycle of the laser. Only for
laser machines.
28 Duty cycle frequency LASER
Numeric value
indicates the time of laser safety in the test. If the laser is
switched on for the test, after this time it will be forced to
29 LASER Timeout security test switch off . Only for laser machines.

Numeric value
Indicates the tension value of laser phase. The tension value
is commanded when the cycle is online but not yet running.
30 LASER standby tension value For laser machine only.

Numeric value.
Indicates the wait time that the software must comply in
case of marking of two fields with the different laser
voltages values. This time is necessary to allow the laser
31 LASER power adjustment time
source to reach the new value of power required.

Numeric value.
Indicates whether to enable the management of the serial
port for external control of the controller. If enabled, a new
button in the system parameter screen will be displayed,
here it will be possible to configure the serial communication.
32 Serial enabling
Settable also by Supervisor level.

Value choice (NO –YES)


Indicates the password to perform for the maintenance
management of the machine
33 Password maintenance
Numeric value.
Indicates the maximum density of the dots settable in the
Maximum density of the editor in the fields with continuous working mode.
34
continuous mode
Numeric value.
Indicates the type of mapping to use on USB keyboard
connected to the controller. It is possible to use the special
"Barcode" mapping to enable the control of an USB barcode
reader, Setting the value to "Barcode" the access button to
35 USB Keyboard Mapping
barcode programming environment will be enables.

Settable also by supervisor level.

Indicates the maximum axis speed without using ramps.


Ramps are used if the axis speed is greater than this value.
36 Speed limit ramp
Numeric value
Allow to set the TTF filling when the system is configured for
Laser. If enabled, it is possible to set the filling parameters
37 Laser filling enabling
in the TTF editor screen from the editor.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 143
Value choice (NO –YES)
Indicates the possibility to select the type of use of the third
axis managed by the controller. If the parameter is set to
SWITCHING, the software will use the third axis, of course if
enabled, with the phase switching via relay. Otherwise, if the
parameter is set to STEP / DIR software will use the third
38 Third axis type
axis by controlling the frequency directly on the appropriate
channel. To use the STEP / DIR it is required the FD1 motor
with integrated drive and a control board AC500 B.

Value of choice (SWITCHED - STEP / DIR).


Allow to select the third axis: Z-Axis (Vertical Axis) or Theta
Axis (Rotational Axis). Enabling the third axis management,
all the software environments will be changed to allow the
39 Third axis management
use of this axis.

Value choice (Disabled – Z AXIS – THETA AXIS)


Indicates the possibility to set which axis, between Y and
Theta, should be kept in pairs during a state of rest (end of
the cycle, pause command, etc..). Depending on the setting
of this parameter, the switching will be set so as to maintain
in pairs an axis rather than another. The parameter is only
taken into account for the third axis Theta in rotational
working mode.
Axis in pairs at rest (
40
rotational theta)
If the Theta is set as axis to maintain in pairs, the logic
setting of the axes will change. First it will be the controlled
the calibration of the axes X, Y and only afterwards the
calibration of Theta axis.

Value of choice (Y-AXIS - THETA AXIS).


Indicates the possibility to set the switching output of the
relay of the third axis on a custom dedicated output. This
allows to connect the management of the relay outside the
controller. The dedicated output for such management is the
number 4 (corresponding to the pin 18 of connector I / O).
The software also allows to set the parameter to establish
the logic output operation: if set to ON / Y AXIS means that
External management of the when the digital output will be high, the Y axis will be
41
relay controlled (with low output the third axis will be controlled)
On the contrary if set ON / THIRD AXIS means that when
the output will be high, the third axis will be controlled
(with low output the Y-axis will be controlled). Of course, if
the value is set to OFF, the normal internal management of
the relay will be used.

Value of choice (OFF - ON / Y AXIS - ON / THIRD AXIS).


Indicates the default value of the diameter of the workpiece
Standard diameter workpiece
to be used in marking programs Theta axis
42 theta axis
Numeric value.
Indicates the position of the Y axis in case of marking with
Y position theta axis Theta axis (perpendicular mode).
43
processing
Numeric value
Indicates the maximum number of markings history files that
Maximum number of markings can be saved in the marking controller memory. If the
44
history parameters is set to 0, the functionality is disabled.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 144
Numeric value
Indicates how to manage the saving of the history markings.
Modes are the following:
• Multiple files: allows the saving of
markings of the same program.
• Single file: allows the saving of a single
file each program. More markings of the
Type of history markings
45 same program will not be saved.
saving
• Barcode: The history file saving will be
made by barcode. It will be possible to
use the barcode reader to insert the file
name to be saved.

Choice (Multiple files – Single file – BARCODE)
Indicates the possibility to enable the advanced
management of the history markings. If enabled more
Advanced Management history information will be stored in the history markings, for a more
46 advanced data management.
markings

Value choice (NO - YES).


Allow to set automatic parking. If enabled, the marking head
will move automatically to park position after an online
47 Automatic parking setting of the machine and after any loading of a program.

Value choice (NO – YES)


Indicates the management mode of the command flag %X
(Date). The settable management can be the american one
48 Command mode flag %X (MM/DD/YYYY) or the european one (DD/MM/YYYY).

Value choice (AMERICAN – EUROPEAN)


Indicates the management to follow in case of abort of a
marking program with serial numbers repeated.

In case of ANY management, the software will not modify


any value and as for value of the repetitions number it will
be considered the numbers corresponding to the executions.

Abort management for serial In case of AUTOMATIC management, the software will reset
49
number repetitions the repetitions value to the previous number at the start of
the cycle

In case of MANUAL management, a message will ask if the


user wants to reset or not the repetitions number.

Value choice (ANY – AUTOMATIC – MANUAL)


Indicates the possibility to enable the network management
of the controllers. If the management is enabled, it will be
possible to use the controller in a network communication.
50 Enabling network controller
The changes of this parameter requires a reboot of the
controller.

Value choice (NO - YES.


Indicates whether to enable the management of the offline
of the controller at the abort of a cycle. If enabled, in case of
Offline control unit in case of an abort cycle the controller will go offline state. You will
51
ABORT then need to redo the online machine.

Value of choice (NO - YES).

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 145
Indicates whether to enable the customized management of
the shifts coded. If enabled, it will be possible to configure
the advanced settings of the codes of shifts in a personalized
Customized management of way. Using in a a text field the command flag associated to
52
the shifts codes the codes of the shifts, it will be considered the value
specified in the customized configuration.

Value of choice (NO - YES).


Indicates how many Modbus axes must be managed by the
controller. The maximum settable number of axes Modbus is
four. If the parameter is set to zero, the management of
Modbus motors will be disabled.
53 Number of axes Modbus FD1
To use these motors, the ones type FD1 with integrated
drive and a wiring via RS485 are needed.

Value of your choice (0 to 4).


Indicates the pin type that must be handled by software.
This parameter will be then used to check if the selected
head is compatible with the software settings. In fact, this
parameter is used to ensure greater security checks as the
54 Pin type command of a pneumatic using a controller configured to
control an electric pin can cause failure of the EV.
This parameter can only be set on the AC500 board B.

Value of choice (PNEUMATIC - ELECTRICAL).


Indicates the percentage of modulation of the current used
to drive the electric pin. The percentage is applied to the
Percentage modulation maximum current value manageable on an electric pin.
55
electric pin This parameter can only be set on the ECU Board AC500 B.

Numerical value (10 to 100).


Indicates whether to enable the management of the DONE
signal with inverse logic. If enabled, it will be possible to
reverse the logic of the OUTPUT signal of DONE. With the
Enabling inverse logic signal inverse logic the signal will be as follows:
56
DONE - Non-marking, end of program signal = OFF signal
- Control unit marking = ON signal

Value of choice (NO - YES).


Indicates whether to enable the management of the READY
signal with inverse logic. If enabled, it will be possible to
reverse the logic of the signal OUTPUT of READY. With the
Enabling inverse logic signal inverse logic the signal will be as follows:
57
READY - OFFLINE unit, not marking = OFF signal
- Control unit marking = ON signal

Value of choice (NO - YES).


Indicates whether to enable the management of loading
programs from a network server. If enabled, it will be
possible to upload any file from the network server set. In
Enabling files loading from
58 order to use this management, it is necessary to purchase its
the network
additional functionality from the store

Value of choice (NO - YES).


Indicates the keyboard mapping to use in the virtual
keyboard displayed for the texts insertion. Selecting the
Default mapping, the software will present the standard
59 Mapping virtual keyboard
alphanumeric keyboard present.

Value of choice (Default - ...).

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 146
Indicates the password to use to enable a marking cycle
from touch. If the parameter will be set to 0, the operator
will not receive any request.
60 Password cycle enabling
In order to use this parameter, it is necessary to buy from
the store the additional function.

Numeric value
Indicates the expiration time of a cycle enabling from
password. If the parameter will be set to zero and the cycle
will be enabled through password, any enabling request will
be made until the system reboot. The password will be
displayed again at the expiration of the set time (relative to
Password request time for
61 the last enabling / start of the controller).
cycle enabling
In order to use this management it is necessary to purchase
from the store its additional functionality.

Numeric value
It indicates the enabling of the extended protocol
management on Ethernet network. In particular it will be
Extended protocol enabling on possible to use the extended protocol (see chapter about
62
Ethernet SW communications) on a TCP-IP protocol.

Value of choice (NO – YES)


It indicates the possibilità to enable the compression of
datamatrix format.
63 Enabling Datamatrix THE PARAMETER HAS BEEN DELETED STARTING FROM THE
(DEL) compression SW VERSION 3.1.0

Value of choice (NO – YES)


Indicates the possibility to enable the reset associated with a
temporal event of the programs serial numbers, even for
Reset serial numbers
63 the not running programs.
programmed in background
Value of choice (NO – YES)
Indicates the possibility to enable the management of the
validity check of the data for the text fields.
In order to use this management it is necessary to purchase
64 Enabling data check text fields from the store its additional functionality.

Value of choice (NO - YES)


Indicates the type of enabling of the printer for labels.
It will be possible to select : CYCLE END where the print will
be carried out at the end of each marking. REQUEST where
the printing request will be carried out at every cycle end
65 Enabling labels printer
and it will be possible to choose whether to do it or not.,
BARCODE where the print will be recalled from barcode.

Value of choice (CYCLE END – REQUEST– BARCODE)


Indicates the enabling for the repetitiveness check at the
marking start. This parameter will be enabled only if the
Enabling no-repetitiveness
66 function will be purchased from the store.
check
Value of choice ( NO - YES)
Automatic export markings Indicates the enabling of the automatic export of the history
67
history

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 147
Value of choice ( NO - YES)
Indicates the mode that will be used for the decoding of the
command flag %T. With this parameter it will be possible to
68 Command flag %T mode select to mark the time with or without the seconds value.

Value of choice (HH:MM - HH:MM:SS)


Indicates the enabling of the dialogue messages in case of
particular events or mistakes occured in the software. An
example is the error due to failure to upload the program
Enabling screen display
69 from barcode reader when the requested program is not
messages
present in the controller.

Value of choice (NO - YES)


Indicates the enabling of the management of the counter
reset of the marking programs execution from the operator
level. This parameter will be enabled only if the function will
Reset execution from operator
70 be purchased from the store.
level

Value of choice (NO - YES)


Indicates the increase value to use for the special
management of the Julian day from flag command . The
value will be used to calculate the increase of the number
Increase value command flag
71 every 24 * hours value. This parameter will be enabled only
%j
if the function will be purchased from the store.

Numeric value

4.9 Setting of the axis parameters

The software allows to configure the parameters of the axis of the marking system
according to the mechanical characteristics of the machine.

In the software there is a configuration environment of all these parameters that concern
the X and Y axis.
To configure the parameters of the axis it is required to be as manufacturer user, as the
editing data operations are extremely delicate and require special attention while inserting
these values.

To configure the axis parameters:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, push the setup system settings button;

Setup button

2. A screen with the possible editable will open;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 148
Configuration setting screen of the system parameters

To modify the axis parameters, press on the Axis data button.

Axis data button

3. A screen for the selection of the axis to configure will open.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 149
Axis selection screen

To select the axis to configure, press on one of the button concerning the axes
controlled by the software.

4. A new screen to insert the axis parameters will open.

Table for the insertion of the axis parameters

5. Once set the desired parameters, exit to save the changes.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 150
Here is a brief description of the axis parameters present in the table:

Parameter Description
Indicates the number of the encoder pulse. Data provided by
the manufacturer of the encoder.
1 Encoder pulses number
Numeric value.
Indicates the revolution quote of the encoder. This is the
distance travelled in one devolution of the encoder.
2 Quote round encoder
Numeric value.
Indicates the maximum quote of the selected axis.
3 Maximum quote
Numeric value.
Indicates the minimum quote of the selected axis.
4 Minimum quote
Numeric value.
Indicates the maximum speed at which you can move the
axis.
5 Maximum speed
Numeric value.
Indicates the speed of the axis during the calibration. During
this operation, the axis moves searching for FC calibration.
6 FC calibration speed research
Numeric value.
Indicates the acceleration ramp time (seconds). It defines
the time the axis takes to reach the maximum speed
7 Acceleration time (parameter 5) starting from the rest position.

Numeric value
Indicates the deceleration ramp time (seconds). It defines
the time the axis takes to stop starting from the maximum
8 Deceleration time speed (parameter 5).

Numeric value
Indicates the maximum frequency of the axis drive. Value in
in Hz.
9 Maximum frequency
Numeric value.
Indicates the quote of the axis calibration.
10 Calibration quote
Numeric value.
Indicates the direction of the axis calibration. This value
depends on the direction of the axis. NEXT is towards big
11 Calibration direction quotes; BACK towards small quotes.

Choice (NEXT – BACK).


Indicates the input digital number prepared for the FC
setting of the axis.
12 Calibration FC channel
Numeric value.
Indicates the displacement quote of the axis, if during the
calibration it is already of the FC
13 Calibration FC output quote
Numeric value.
Indicates the movement direction of the axis.
14 Direction inversion

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 151
Choice (NO - YES).
Indicates the level of the motor current. In particular, the
level can be selected between:
• level 0 (0,7A)
• level 1 (0,9A)
15 Current motor level
• level 2 (1,4A)
• level 3 (1,7A)

Choice (LEVEL 0 – LEVEL 1 – LEVEL 2 – LEVEL 3).

NOTE
When setting the axis movement direction,
it is important to change also the direction
parameters of calibration and calibration quote.

4.10 Setting of the machine maintenance

From the configuration parameters environment it is possible to set the necessary data for
the request of machine maintenance. In the setting of the machines maintenance data, it
is possible to insert some checks to ask for a maintenance of the machine after a certain
time of use. At the software startup, these check will be performed and, if any of these is
verified, a screen showing a message with the maintenance to perform will open. It can
also be combined with a descriptive picture of the maintenance service in question. From
the displayed screen it is possible to give the enabling of performed maintenance.

To modify the controller maintenance data it is necessary to be a distributor or


manufacturer user.

To set the parameters of the recommended maintenance:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, push the system setup settings button;

Button of system setup

2. A screen with the indication of the possible editable parameters will open;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 152
Configuration screen of the system parameters

To modify the maintenance parameters, push the maintenance button.

Maintenance button

3. In the maintenance environment are visible the maintenance counters ( per number
of marking shots and hours of controller use ) and the table of the maintenances
managed on the controller .

Maintenance counters data

Maintenance counters data

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 153
• Maintenance counters data refer to the shots marked in absolute and to the
number of hours of use of the controller.
Both counters can be reset at any time. Also the hours counter can be set either
on the total hours of use of the controller or on the controller marking hours

Data of the recommended maintenance

• The data of the recommended maintenance can be inserted into the table.

4.11 Setting the head store

From the configuration parameters environment it is possible to customize the marking


heads store. The heads store helps to manage the parameters related to the marking
head and offers the possibility to insert parameters for three different ways of marking:
high quality, normal and fast. These modes are used to set the quality of the marking of a
field. For each of these modes, it is possible to define the speed and timing of marking,
needed to configure the performance of the various fields of the programs.

To insert, modify or cancel an head from the store it is necessary to be a manufacturer


user.

To configure the parameters of the heads store:

1. In the auxiliary functions screen, press on the system setup settings button ;

Setup button

2. A screen with the indication of the possible editable parameters will open;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 154
Configuration screen of system parameters

To modify the heads of the heads store, press the head store button.

Head store button

3. Pressing the heads store button, following window will be displayed:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 155
Management screen of heads store setting

In the table on the left of the screen there is the store with the marking heads
actually available on AC500 controller.

It is possible to insert or remove a marking head using the


buttons on the right of the screen.

The marking head has some parameters independent from the type of
configuration: the name describing the head that will appear in the selection of the
head and during the program performance, the parking speed, the prepositioning
speed , the solenoid valve current value and the type of marking to associate with
the head.
All these values can be inserted directly in the table.

NOTE
The setting of the marking type to associate
with the head will affect the program
modification, since the execution mode of each
field will depend on the head currently selected.

For each marking head it is possible to insert the working parameters for three
modes: HIGH QUALITY, NORMAL and FAST.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 156
To insert the parameters of each processing, press the modification button

.
Pressing this button, it will be possible to enter the head parameters screen.

Setting screen of the head parameters

It will be possible also possible to select which marking head to work with.

For the user with level supervisor and distributor level, it will be possible to select
the marking head simply entering the system setup environment of the auxiliary
functions menu.

With Manufacturer level it will be necessary to press the button next to the heading
head selection, in the menu of the system parameters.

It will be also possible to select the head to use.

For the users with supervisor and distributor operational level it will be possible to
select the head simply logging into the environment of system setup of the menu of
the auxiliary functions.

With operational level manufacturer i twill be necessary to press the button near
selected head in the menu of the system parameters.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 157
Following will be the window displayed:

Marking head selection screen

The table will list all the marking heads present in the store and it will be enough
to select the head to be used and to confirm the change at the exit.

Finally, during the editing of the program, for each field of the program it will be
possible to select the way to perform the marking. To choose the mode, just
select the heading in the drop-down menu next to the field type.

Parameter Description
Indicates the level of the solenoid current. In particular, the
level of current of the solenoid valves, which are controlled
in current (with power 48V) but are distinguished by the
power level, is selectable between:

AC500 - Board A:
Current level of the solenoid • level 0 (4W)
valve • Level 1 (5W)
• Level 2 (6W)
• Level 3 (12W)

AC500 - Board B or higher revision:


• PNEUMATIC (5W)
• ELECTRIC (12W)

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 158
Value of choice:
Board A (LEVEL 0- LEVEL 1 - LEVEL 2 - LEVEL 3)
Board B or higher revision (PNEUMATIC - ELECTRIC)

Programs editor screen with the field concerning the Mode/Quality marking in evidence

Below is a brief description of the parameters of the marking head present in the table of
the heads store :

Parameter Description
Indicates the activation time of the descent of the solenoid
valve. Expressed in milliseconds.
1 Pin drop time
Numeric value.
Indicates the time between the decommissioning of the
release of descent of the solenoid valve in a marking and the
beginning of the axis movement of axes for the execution of
2 Pin rise time next marking. Expressed in milliseconds.

Numeric value.
Indicates the time between the end of the axis movement
for the execution of a marking and the activation of the output
descent of the solenoid valve, . This value can also take
negative values allowing to anticipate the moment of
3 Marking delay time activation than the arrival into place. Expressed in
milliseconds.

Numeric value.
Indicates the minimum time between two consecutive
markings. It intervenes especially in continuous mode in
4 Pin recovery time
general when a very high dot density is required.
This parameter can only be set on AC500 Board B.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 159
Numeric value.
Indicates the marking speed of the head movement during
marking.
5 Marking speed
Numeric value.
Indicates the marking speed during marking of the head, in
vibrating or scribe mode.
6 Vibrating/scribe speed
Numeric value.
Indicates the speed of movement when executing a Goto
field in the program.
7 GOTO speed
Numeric value.
Indicates the transfer speed of the marking head during the
transfer from one field to the following one.
8 Transfers speed
Numeric value.

The pin drop time, the pin rise time and delay time of marking are here represented:

Shift

Solenoid

1. 2. 3.

1. Delay marking time;


2. Marking head drop time ;
3. Marking head rise time.

4.12 Setting of the system language

The software allows to configure the operating system language. The language can be
configured by selecting one of the languages present in the software. Once selected the
language, all the software messages will be replaced by the ones of the new language
selected. The manufacturer user can add, delete or edit the system languages. The user
distributor can only enable/disable the languages present in the software.

In order to configure the system language, it is necessary to be a supervisor, distributor


or manufacturer user.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 160
To configure the system language:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, push on the system setup settings button;

Setup button

2. A screen with the indication of the possible editable parameters will open;

Configuration screen of the system parameters

To modify the system language, push the language configuration button.

Language configuration button

3. A screen where it will be possible to select the language to configure will be displayed.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 161
Language selection screen

From this screen it will be possible to select the language to use in the software.

4. Once selected the desired language, exit to save the changes.

The manufacturer user has also the possibility to manage the software languages in order
to customize the messages and the languages used in the software.
To customize the languages management it necessary to enter the languages
management environment using the button here below:

Languages management button

In the environment of system languages management it is possible to insert, delete or


edit the languages. Managed by the software.
Following is the environment:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 162
Screen of languages management

To add a new language, use the button , to delete a language use the

button

The table contains all the current languages available. For each language are indicated
several information such as: the name of the language, the associated translations file,
the image to display on the button in the language configuration environment and the
language enabling.

Pressing the translations file cell or on the cell concerning the image to associate, the
screen of file management will be displayed ; from this screen it will be possible to load
the appropriate files from the memory of the controller. It will be also possible to load
files from a USB key, too.

The distributor user has access to this environment to select the enabling status of each
language. If a language is not enabled, it will not be possible to select it from the list.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 163
4.13 Setting of software graphics

The software allows to customize some graphic components, such as the splashscreen
display at the software startup.

In order to configure the graphic components of the system, it is necessary to be as


manufacturer user.

To configure it is necessary:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, push the system setup settings button;

System setup button

2. A screen with the indication of the possible editable parameters will open;

Configuration screen of the system parameters

To modify the software graphics configuration, push the button of the graphic
configuration.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 164
Graphic configuration button

5. The software will display a screen where it will be possible to set the parameters of
the graphic configuration:

Graphic selection screen

From this screen it will be possible to set an image to display as splash screen at
the software startup. It is even possible to set the duration time of the splashscreen
displaying. In case this time has not been set, the splashscreen is displayed by
default to 3 seconds

Once set the configuration parameters of the software graphics, exit to save the changes.

4.14 Setting of the serial

The software allows to configure the serial port of the controller to communicate with a
host computer. The serial configuration is required in order to communicate with positive
results with a host computer

NOTE
The configuration of the serial is only available
in case of enabling the management of the
serial from the general parameters of the
software. Otherwise the button of the serial
configuration setting of the system will remain
disabled.

To configure the serial of the system it is necessary to be as supervisor, distributor or


manufacturer user.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 165
To configure the serial:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen , press the setup system settings button:

Setup button

System setup button

2. A screen with the indication of the possible editable parameters will open;

Configuration screen of the system parameters

To change the configuration of the serial, press the button of configuration of the
serial

Serial configuration button

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 166
3. The software will display a screen it will be possible to set the serial data software

Configuration screen of the serial parameters

In this screen it will be possible to configure the serial and test the data sending
and receiving using the settings set.

Port Parameter that defines the communications port to use. By


default the parameter is set on COM1.
Parameter that defines the baud rate speed to be used in
Baud rate communication. Baud rate speed is the speed of data
transmission and reception (data bits per second) of the serial.
The default is set to 9600

Data Parameter that defines the number of data bits to manage on


the serial port. The value must match the number of data bits
set on the host computer.
Parameter that defines the value of the parity bit of the serial.
Parity
This value is used to check eventual problems in the data
transmission. The value must match the parity bit set on the
host computer
Stop Parameter that defines the number of stop bits to manage on
the serial. The value must match the stop bits set on the host
computer.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 167
Control Parameter that defines the type of control to manage on the
serial port. The value must match the control value set on the
host computer.

ID Station Parameter that defines the station number to use to start the
serial communication.

To test the serial configuration, it is necessary :

a. Open the communication port, through the appropriate button of port


opening:

b. Enter a string command into the text box at the bottom of the serial test
page

c. (optional) enable the special characters of carriage return or end of the


string

d. Press the button of serial sending

e. Close the communication port , through the appropriate button

To test the receiving of the serial configuration, it is necessary :

a. Open the communication port through the appropriate button of port opening

b. In case of receipt through the serial port, the data received will be displayed in
the appropriate text box.

c. (optional) it is possible to cancel the text into the text box, pushing the clean
button

d. Close the communication port , using the appropriate the button

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 168
In case neither the sending nor the receiving of the serial works, verify the data set
in the configuration or check the cable connection between the controller and the
host

4. Once set the configuration, exit to save the data

It is also possible to select the type of protocol used in the serial communication. The
protocols available are: extended protocol , programmable protocol and modbus protocol
( this last one can be enabled after purchasing the function from AC500 Store) For further
information about the use and configuration of these protocols, please see the
appropriate section of the manual.
NOTE
The setting of the serial parameters can be
inhibited by the software in case of enabling of
the functions of control Modbus axis
(occupying the port 485) and the management
of Fieldbus protocols (which occupy the port
232).

4.15 USB barcode configuration

The marking software allows to configure a possible barcode reader connected to the
controller through the USB port. The configuration of the barcode reader is required to
customize the functions to be associated with the data read by barcode. These settings
are valid only for USB barcode.

NOTE
The configuration of the USB barcode is only
available in case of enabling of the barcode
management from the general parameters of
the marking software. Otherwise the button of
the barcode configuration setting will not be
enabled.

The USB barcode can be configured from the following levels: supervisor, distributor or
manufacturer.

To configure the USB barcode:

1.From the screen of the auxiliary functions, press the system setup settings button;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 169
System setup button

2. A screen with the indication of the possible editable parameters will open;

Configuration screen of the system parameters

To change the barcode configuration, press the barcode configuration button.

Barcode configuration button

3 . The software will display a screen for setting the barcode data

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 170
Configuration screen barcode reader parameters

In this screen it will be possible to configure the protocol used by the system to analyze
the data received from the barcode reader.
See the appropriate section of this manual for additional information.

Together with the parameters of protocol setting, it is also possible to enable/disable some
other barcode functions.

• Enabling ID field: this parameter indicates if the message received from the barcode
contains an ID for the identification of a specific field of the marking program or a
specific query. If this parameter is enabled, the system will expect to receive the
following format:

Tnn<string>

where:

T = Indicates the message type

nn = two digits number indicating the field number or the query table where data
must be inserted. If message type is P ( selection of a program) this number is
not used.

<string>= program name (message type Pattern) or field (message type Update,
Overwrite, Query, Append or Next).

For additional information on the fields, please refer to the related section of the
manual.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 171
NOTE

Enable field ID only if using the message type 0.

• Saving marking program at loading: this parameter indicates if after loading a


program from barcode, the current program stored in the memory will be saved or not.
If this parameter is enabled, the current marking program will be saved before loading
a new program requested by the barcode, otherwise , if this parameter is disabled ,
the current program will not be saved and the program requested by the barcode will
be loaded. This means that it could be possible to lose changes made and not saved
regarding the program substituted by the one requested from the barcode.

• Enable checksum control for marking start : this parameter indicates if it is


necessary to receive the checksum control message from barcode to start a marking
cycle. If enabled, the program loaded from the barcode will not be executable until
the checksum control will not be launched. If the checksum will be ok, it will be
possible to proceed with the marking cycle. If disabled, the marking program will be
executed normally.

• Resetting modified fields at the end of the marking : this parameter is used to
determine whether to delete or not the edited fields through barcode reader upon
execution of a program. With this management enabled it is possible to reset
automatically a program that must be run with fields read by the barcode reader.

• Auto NEXT: ( so the move between the text fields of the program) automatically after
reading a barcode of type OVERWRITE (Type 1) or type APPEND (Type A). With this
function it will be possible to read a barcode to edit a text field and ensure the shift to
the next one to change it though another reading. This new management will have the
advantage of having the management of the NEXT command without having a
dedicated barcode to be read.

4.16 Network setting configuration

The software allows to set the network configurations of the controller in case of
connection via Ethernet to a LAN network or to access via dial-up connection to the
controller. In the environment of the network settings it is possible to configure the IP
address of the controller, the subnet mask and gateway address. Also, if the management
of the controller network is enabled, the controller can be configured as MASTER or
SLAVE.

For the configuration of the network settings it is necessary to be as user supervisor,


distributor o manufacturer.

To configure the network settings :

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 172
1. From the auxiliary functions screen, push the button of the setup system settings ;

Button of setup system

2. A screen with the indication of the possible editable parameters will open;

Configuration screen of the system parameters

To modify the configuration of the network settings, push the network settings
configuration button .

Configuration button of network settings

3 . The software will display a screen too set the network settings data

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 173
Configuration screen of network settings

4. To change any value simply press on the appropriate text boxes, and insert the
new data. When a data has changed, it is represented on the screen in red.

Example of change of a data

5. In order to change the data with the new settings it is necessary to press the
confirmation button. An information screen, asking whether to use the modified
settings or not, will be displayed.
Confirm the request in case of change of the settings.

In case of enabling of the parameter of the network controller management (see


description of the general data in the manual section ) another button, allowing to modify
its settings, will be displayed.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 174
Configuration screen of network settings

Settings related to the management of controllers network are needed to identify the
behaviour of the controller in the network. Especially it is necessary to specify the role of
the controller (MASTER or SLAVE) and its settings. For more information about the
operation of the controller network management , see the appropriate section of the
manual "Managing network of controller".

Configuration MASTER controller

To configure a controller as master it is necessary to set the type parameter as MASTER


and the port that will be used to receive the connections from the slaves. It is also
possible to set a name to identify the controller in the network.

Configuration screen of master controller

For the master controller it is possible to display all the SLAVE controllers connected at the
moment.To display these information just press the button:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 175
Button of network visualization

The screen will display a table including all the controllers connected to the MASTER
controller, showing the IP address.

Display screen of SLAVE connected

Configuration SLAVE controller

To configure a controller as slave it is necessary to set the type parameters at SLAVE,


together with the port and IP address that will be used for the connection with the master.
It is also possible to set a name to identify the controller in the network.

Configuration screen of the slave controller

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 176
NOTE
By changing the setting parameters of network
configuration, a reboot of the controller will be
required.

4.17 Configuration and use of machines database

The software allows to create and use a set of backup configurations for various types of
machines in order to facilitate the procedure of controller configuration at the connection
with a marking machine. Each configuration created in database machines contains all the
necessary information for the configuration of the machine, i.e. the general data, the data
of the axes and the data of the heads store. In the database machines it is possible to
insert a new configuration with the current parameters set on the controller, change or
upload a configuration and import or export a configuration database on a USB key.

To configure and use the machines database it is necessary to be as user distributor o


manufacturer.

To configure the machines database:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, press the button of the setup settings of the
system;

Button of system setup

2. A screen with the indication of the possible editable system parameters will be
displayed;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 177
Configuration screen of system parameters

To modify the configuration of the machines database, press the configuration


button of the machines database.

Configuration button of machines database

3. It will be displayed a screen where it will be possible to configure the machines


database.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 178
Screen of machines database

The environment displayed will consist of a series of buttons for functionalities (addition,
change , delete, etc. of a configuration of machines database) , of a preview of
configurations present in the controller (grouped by supplier) and a series of information
describing the selected configuration.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

1. Button for inserting a new configuration;


2. Button to delete the selected configuration;
3. Button to edit the selected configuration;
4. Button for the saving of the selected configuration on USB;
5. Button for the uploading of a configuration from USB;
6. Button for the uploading of the selected configuration data;
7. Button for the exit from environment.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 179
1
.
2.

Display of database configurations divided each supplier

1. Suppliers display:
2. Configurations display each supplier.

1.

2.

Information displax of selected configuration

1. Information display of the selected configuration;


2. Display optional image set for the selected configuration.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 180
Add a new configuration

Using the button to add a new configuration, it will be possible to enter the configuration
(general data, axis data and heads store) actually present in the controller in the
machines database. After pressing the button a new screen will be displayed, this will
allow to insert the descriptive data of the configuration added.

Environment for the insertion of a new configuration

In this environment it will be possible to insert descriptive data ( supplier, product and
description) and an optional image to set for the configuration to be added. Using the two
buttons on the right of the screen it is possible to decide whether to accept or not the
changes made.

Delete a configuration

Using the button to delete a configuration, it will be possible to delete the configuration
actually selected in the list of the machines database. After pressing the button it will be
displayed a message asking to confirm or not the deletion procedure. NOTE: in case of

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 181
selection of a supplier and pressing the deletion button, it will be possible to delete all the
configurations associated with that supplier.

Edit a configuration

Using the button for the editing of a configuration it will be possible to edit (in terms of
descriptive data of the configuration, not the data set) the configuration actually selected
in the list of the machines database. After pressing the button it will be displayed a screen
where it will be possible to edit the descriptive fields and any image associated with the
configuration ).

Environment for the insertion of a configuration

In this environment it will be possible to edit the descriptive data ( supplier, product and
description) and the optional image to set for the configuration to be added. Using the
two buttons on the right of the screen it is possible to decide whether to accept or not the
changes made.

Save a configuration on USB

Using the button for the saving of a configuration on USB it will be possible to save the
configuration actually selected in the list of the machines database on the USB key

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 182
inserted in the controller. After pressing the button, it will be displayed a message asking
to confirm or not the saving procedure. NOTE: in case of selection of a supplier and
pressing the saving button, it will be possible to save all the configurations associated with
that supplier.

Upload a configuration from USB

Using the button for the uploading of a configuration from USB, it will be possible to
upload a configuration from the USB key inserted in the controller. After pressing the
button, it will be displayed a screen showing the configurations present in the USB key.
NOTE: in case of selection of a supplier and pressing the uploading button, it will be
possible to upload all the configurations associated with that supplier.

Uploading of a configuration

Using the button for the uploading of a configuration it will be possible to upload the data
set of the configuration actually selected in the list of the configurations present in the
controller. After pressing the button, it will be displayed a message asking to confirm or
not the uploading procedure of the configuration. NOTE: in case of attempt to load a data
set created with a later version of the software currently present on the controller, it will
be displayed a warning message of the operation.

4.18 Time and date setting

The software allows to set the current date and time of the system. The date and time are
used for the flag commands, maintenance controls and other features already described in
this manual.

To configure the time and date, it is necessary to be as supervisor, distributor or


manufacturer user.

To configure the time and date:

1. On the main screen, press on the system time and date label;

Displaying of system time and date

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 183
2. A screen will be displayed and it will be possible to set up the system time and
date;

Configuration screen of the time and date

To modify the system time or date, press the set button, nearby the field to
modify.

Screen of date configuration

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 184
Screen of time configuration

To modify one value of the date or the time, push on the text box containing the
field end enter the new value in the numeric keyboard.

3. Once modified the date and the time, push the button modify on the right side of
the screen

4.19 Setting of the windows header

The software also allows to customize the header of the software windows . For window
header it means the title bar of the windows.

In order to set the header of the windows, it is necessary to be as user supervisor,


distributor or manufacturer.

Example of window bar with header

To set the windows header:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, push the setup system settings button;

Setup system button

2. A screen with the indication of the possible editable parameters will open;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 185
Configuration screen of the system parameters

Enter the text to display as windows header in the text box

Box for the setting of the windows header

3.Once set the new value, exit to save the changes.

4.20 Setting of Modbus axes parameters

The software allows to configure the parameters of the Modbus axes of the marking
system based on the mechanical characteristics of the machine.

The Modbus axes are optional, settable up to a maximum of four from the general data,
and that allow to extend the movements of the marking system. In addition to the
optional axes Zeta and Theta, also two custom axes called X1 and Y1 are configurable.
These axes in terms of movement are fully managed by the operator using the marking
program, in fact it will be possible to manage them only through the GoTo field. These
axes do not have an internal logic managed by software, such as Zeta and Theta axes,
and provide an additional flexibility in the management of marking system.

The Modbus axes are special motors that can be controlled through the use of serial 485
present on the controller and the Modbus protocol. Considering the flexibility of the 485,
which

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 186
guarantees a real network (the presence of multiple devices connected at the same time),
it is possible to control up to four Modbus axes simultaneously.

In order to configure the parameters of Modbus axes it is necessary to be as user


manufacturer, as the data editing to perform are extremely delicate and require special
attention when inserting the values.

To configure the parameters of the Modbus axes:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, press the button of the system setup settings;

Button of system setup

2. This will open a screen showing the possible system parameters that can be
changed;

Configuration screen of the system parameters

To change the parameters of the Modbus axes press the button of the data axes.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 187
Button data axes

3. The software will display a screen to a screen where it will be possible to select the
axis to configure.

Selection screen of the axis to confugure

4. The software will display a new screen with the list of all Modbus axes configured.
In the list of displayed axes there will be the description about the axis setting.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 188
Screen with list of modbus axes

To select the Modbus axis to configure, press the button for the axis to configure.

5. This will open a new screen where it will be possible to enter the parameters of the
axis of the software

Table for entering the parameters of the axes

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 189
6. After setting the desired parameters, exit the to save the changes.

Below is a brief description of the parameters of the Modbus axes in the table:

Parameter Description
Indicates the type of axis to associate with the motor in
configuration. This parameter ha s a strong impact on the
configuration of the motor because it is associated the
operating logic controlled by the software. The default value
1 Motor type
represents an axis not set, and therefore not used.

Value of choice (DEFAULT - Z AXIS - THETA AXIS - X1AXIS -


Y1 AXIS).
Indicates the index identifier of the motor in the serial
network 485. This index must be unique for each Modbus
2 Slave ID motor connected to the controller.

Numeric value.
Indicates the number of encoder pulses. Information
provided by the manufacturer of the encoder. For the motors
3 Number of encoder pulses FD1 used the number of pulses is fixed at 12800.

Numeric value.
Represents the amount of encoder. The quote of the
encoder tour is the distance covered in one tour of the
4 Quote encoder turn encoder.

Numeric value.
Indicates the maximum arrival quote of the selected axis.
5 Maximum quote
Numeric value.
Indicates the minimum arrival quote of the selected axis.
6 Minimum quote
Numeric value.
Indicates the maximum speed at which the axis can move
7 Maximum speed
Numeric value.
Indicates the calibration quote of the axis
8 Calibration quote
Numeric value.
Indicates the speed of the axis during the calibration phase.
In the calibration phase, the axis moves in search of the FC
9 Speed research FC calibration calibration.

Numeric value.
Indicates an offset to be applied to the calibration quote of
the motor.
10 Offset calibration
Numeric value.
Indicates the time in seconds to use in the acceleration
ramps of the axis. More precisely, the parameter indicates
how long the axis takes to reach the maximum speed set
11 Acceleration time
(parameter 5) from a standing start.

Numeric value.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 190
Indicates the time in seconds to be used in deceleration
ramps axis. More precisely, the parameter indicates how long
the axis takes to stop starting from the maximum speed set
12 Deceleration time
(parameter 5).

Numeric value.
Indicates the calibration direction of the axis. This value
depends on the direction of movement of the axis. NEXT is
13 Calibration direction towards big quotes, BACK towards small quotes.

Value of choice (BACK - NEXT).


Indicates the type of management of micro calibration axis.
The micro calibration can be NO (normally open) or NC
14 Type FC calibration (normally closed).

Value of choice (NO - NC).

NOTE
In case of setting of a Modbus axis that is
already configured as optional third axis, in
particular for the axes Z and Theta, it will be
taken as reference the third optional axis and
will be displayed the conflict during Modbus axis
configuration phase.

4.21 AC500Store

The software offers a section dedicated exclusively to the purchase of additional features
not present by default on the software. These features have not a direct impact on the
use of the software, because the don not affect performances or markings managements
and therefore must be considered as extensions that can be applied to software. Among
these extensions there are:

• MODBUS SLAVE

• FIELDBUS

• MANAGEMENT OF CUSTOM SHIFT CODES

• LOADING PROGRAMS FROM NETWORK

• MARKING CYCLE CUSTOM ENABLE

• CUSTOM HOURS CODE

• ENABLE TEXT DATA CHECK

• REPETITIVENESS CONTROL

• RESET EXECUTIONS ( OPERATOR LEVEL)

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 191
• EXTENDED PROTOCOL / ADVANCED FIELDBUS

• MULTIPOINTS MARKING

• SPECIAL MANAGEMENT JULIAN DAY ( FLAG COMMAND)

Below are the descriptions of the extensions that can be bought through the store and
the procedures to be followed for the validation.

To enter the environment AC500 Store:

1. From the screen of the auxiliary functions, press the system setup settings button ;

System setup button

2. This will open a screen showing the possible system parameters that can be
changed;

Configuration screen of the system parameters

To enter the environment AC500 Store, just press the access button to
environment.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 192
Button to access to the AC500 Store

3. The software will display a screen with all the features / extensions that can be
bought for the software

Screen AC500 Store

From this screen it will be possible to purchase the extensions to be enabled on the AC500
controller. Important to note that the purchase of a feature IS VALID ONLY for the
controller on which the feature is enabled. It is not possible in any way enable a function
of the store without first having purchased it on the controller.

NOTE
Performing any backup operation of the unit it
will not be possible to backup of the enabling of
a purchased function.

To purchase a function from the 'AC500 Store simply select any of the functions on the list
and push on the purchase button. If a function is already purchased and present on the
controller it will be displayed with the check and the purchase button will be disabled.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 193
Purchase button functionality

Following will be the screen displayed:

Unlock screen functionality

In the upper part of this screen it will be displayed the code associated with the function
required to purchase. To proceed with the purchase of this feature, it is necessary to
communicate to the AC500 supplier the code indicated. It will then be then given the code
to be inserted to allow the purchase of the functionality.
If this operation will be successful the success of the operation will be visible on the
screen and the function just bought will be displayed as available.

NOTICE
The code to communicate to to unlock the
functionality is valid for 7 days. This means that it is
necessary to enter the unlock code within 7 days
since it was communicated.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 194
Modbus Slave

The function of Modbus slave allows to add a new protocol for the control of the
controllers remotely. The executable operations by the Modbus protocol are the same
that are guaranteed with the use of the extended protocol (see chapter dedicated to the
management of the unit remotely for further details).

To enable the Modbus protocol for remote management of the controller just enter the
configuration environment of the serial port and select the Modbus protocol.

Serial configuration screen with Modbus protocol enabled

As for the specifications of the Modbus Industrial protocol please


refer to the specific object dictionary section dedicated to Modbus
protocol.

Fieldbus

The enabling function Fieldbus boards allows to manage the expansion boards can
inserted in the controller for the Fieldbus protocols managed. Using this functionality
present on the controller, it is possible to expand the possibilities of remote control of the
unit.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 195
The Fieldbus protocols are industrial protocols used throughout the world. The AC500
allows the management of some of these protocols through these expansion boards that
can be added on the controller.

Once unlocked the function to use the Fieldbus protocols, it will be possible to use the
relative parameter from the environment of the software general data in order to use this
feature.

An example of Fieldbus protocol managed is the EtherNet / IP. For all the details about
the Fieldbus protocols see the appendices attached to the manual.

NOTICE
To use the Fieldbus protocols is required the
expansion board mounted on the controller.
Without it it won’t be possible to use the Fieldbus
protocols as remote management of the controller .

NOTE
The Board B is able to handle an automatic
reset of the fieldbus board when the software
application is started. This operation is
necessary to ensure the proper functioning at
the start of the fieldbus module, which could
cause some anomalies on controllers with a
Board A.

Custom shift code handling

The function of custom shift code handling allows to enable the fully customized handling
of the shifts codes. Once purchased this feature, it will be possible to enable the general
parameter Enabling customs shifts codes handling.

If enabled this parameter, it will be possible to configure and customize the advanced
settings of the shifts management. The advanced configurations of the shifts codes
ensure the insertion of the codes of the three work shifts for each day of the week. This
means that it will be possible to enter the codes of the specific shifts for every single day
of the week. When using the flag command associated with the management of the shift
code with this management enabled, a check will be done according to the day of the
week to take the value of the correct shift code.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 196
Setting screen of the parameters of the custom shift code

With the custom management of the shifts code it will be also available the option
Saturday option. This particular mode can be optionally enabled by the operator and
serves to manage the particular case in which the day Saturday should be divided into two
shifts which alternate in the weeks consecutively.

To better explain this concept, imagine to have two shifts, shift A and shift B. Shift A must
work the first and the third saturday of the month, while B has to work the second and
the fourth shift of the month. Using this mode, it will be possible to manage this
particular mode of shifts management.

In order to properly handle this alternation between the shifts, the software requires the
setting of a date of reference from which to start considering the alternation of the
saturday, obviously starting from the consideration of the first shift. Note: The date must
be set before or coinciding with the first saturday that will be worked from the shift one.

Suppose, for example, to assign as relative values to Saturday following values:

- First round: U
- Second round: V

According to the configurations set for the management of the Saturday Option , the
marking shifts will be inserted as follows:

- First Saturday: U
- Second Saturday: V
- Third Sunday: U
- And so on ..

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 197
Setting screen of the parameters of Saturday Option

Programs loading from network

The function of loading programs from network allows to configure the controller AC500
with a network server that can be accessed directly to upload files such as work programs,
bitmap images, dxf, etc.

To use this function it is necessary to configure the network server where to share files
with the controller. Obviously more controllers can be connected to the same network
and with the same server set, in order to allow the sharing of files between all AC500
controllers.

For more details on the configuration and use of the management, consult the
appropriate section in this manual.

Marking cycle custom enable

This feature allows to lock / unlock the print start icon button of the AC500 touch screen
interface, in order to prevent any unauthorized access to the print cycle command.

By setting the general parameters dedicated to the management, it will be displayed a


check password before making any system marking operations.

This feature can be very useful in units placed on an automatic line where it is requested
to exclude the control functions of the head from touch. However, the management leaves
the total control of the head from remote communication.

It also possible to associate an unlocking expiration time, so that the password will be
resubmitted once passed the set time compared with the unlocking operation of the
previous release.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 198
Custom hours code

The project involves the implementation of a new functionality on AC500 SW. As for the
year, month and day codes, it will be implemented the possibility to define the table of
the custom hours codes in the AC500.

In the table there will be 24 entries, one for each hour of the day, to which it will be
possible to associate a text to be used with the new command flag %h.

Enable text data check

La funzione di abilitazione controllo dati testo permetterà di abilitare una nuova gestione di
controllo del contenuto d un campo testuale da marcare. Con questa gestione verrà
proposto un nuovo menù all'interno dei campi di tipo testo all'interno dell'ambiente di
editor dal quale sarà possibile selezionare se abilitare la gestione e specificare il testo di
controllo da utilizzare prima di uno start ciclo. Se il testo presente non rispetterà il formato
del testo visualizzato, non sarà possibile effettuare la marcatura.

The function of control enabling of text data will enable a new check management of the
content of a text field to be marked. This management will show a new menu within the
text fields in the editor environment where it will be possible to select whether to enable
the management and specify the control text to be used before the start of a cycle. If the
text does not respect the format of the text displayed, it will not be possible to mark.

Repetitiveness control

The repetitiveness control function will enable the ability state if a text field if will have to
be verified (and therefore stored at the end of a cycle) to ensure the non-repetition of the
contents of the field.

Reset executions (Operator Level)

The executions reset function for the operator level will enable the ability to reset the
counter of the executions of the marking programs also from the operator level.

Extended protocol / Fieldbus advanced

The function of management of the extended protocol and advanced fieldbus allows to
use the types of commands for the editing of the text fields or arc text.

Multipoints marking management

The function of multipoints marking management allows to make several times the
marking of each point of the program. With this management it will be possible to display
and modify the number of repetitions of the filled out points inside the advanced data of
each marking field in order to perform each point of that field n times according with the
value set.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 199
Example page of a text field with multipoints management

During the implementation phase it will be carried out the management of these
repetitions in order to control the descent / ascent of the pin for the number of times set
in the field of the program, considering the time needed for the ascent of the head before
commanding the repetition of the descent. This particular time can be set inside the
marking head data.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 200
Example of configuration head with multipoints management

Julian day management ( flag command)

This management function of special Julian day will allow to use the command flag %j
inside the fields of the program.
This management allows the same functioning of the command flag %J with the
particularity that the increase of the Julian Day will take place every n days, where n is an
adjustable value in the general data of the software.
An example:

Date Julian day (standard) Julian day (special, increase to 1).


01/01/2015 001 001
02/01/2015 002 001
03/01/2015 003 003
04/01/2015 004 003
17/11/2015 321 321
18/11/2015 322 321
19/11/2015 323 323
20/11/2015 324 323

4.22 Configuration Fieldbus board

Once enabled the management of the Fieldbus boards from environment AC500 Store
and from parameter present in the general data, it will be possible to enter the
configuration environment of the Fieldbus board connected to the controller. The software
is able to automatically recognize the type of the connected board and then will propose
automatically the necessary configurations necessary for the proper use of the board.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 201
The management of the Fieldbus protocols allows to add further possibilities in the remote
control of the unit, as is the case of the extended protocol on serial RS232.

NOTICE
The Fieldbus board uses nside the RS232. This
means that it will not be possible to use this serial
port for the other functions of the software.

To enter the Fieldbus configuration environment:

1. From the screen of the auxiliary functions, press the setup systems settings button:

System setup button

2. This will open a screen showing the possible system parameters that can be
changed;

Configuration screen of the system parameters

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 202
To access to the Fieldbus configuration environment, just press the access button
to the environment.

Fieldbus onfiguration button

3. The software displays a screen showing all the information about the connected
Fieldbus module:

Example of screen configuration Fieldbus board

At the top of the displayed screen will be shown all information in read-only which are the
same for all Fieldbus modules:

• Serial Number: production serial number of the Fieldbus board;

• Firmware: firmware version on the Fieldbus module;

• Type: type of connected Fieldbus module (eg Etheret / IP).

These information are also useful for verifying the correct operation of the Fieldbus board
connected with the AC500. In fact, if any module hasn’t been connected with the
controller, these data will be used as follows:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 203
Example of screen module not recognized

In the event that the controller does not detect the module information, it is necessary to
try to restart the controller and verify that all connections are properly made.

At the bottom of the screen it will be displayed all the information concerning the
connected module type. These configurations may not be necessary in some cases.

For further information on the modules and their configurations is possible to consult the
appendices present in this manual.

4.23 Management programs loading from the network

Once enabled the management of the programs loading from the network AC500 Store
and from parameter present in the general data, it will be possible to access to the
environment configuration of the network server that contains the files that must be
shared with the AC500 controller. Important to note that the server with which the
controller AC500 is going to be connected should have Windows operating system.

To configure the settings of the network server:

1. From the screen of the auxiliary functions, press the system setup settings button;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 204
System setup button

2. This will open a screen showing the possible system parameters that can be
changed;

Configuration screen of the system parameters

To change the configuration of the settings of the network server, press the
configuration button of the network settings.

Button configuration network settings

3. The screen of the network settings from controller will be displayed.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 205
Configuration screen network settings

To change the settings of the network server press the button of server network
configuration. .

Configuration button settings network server

4. The software will display a screen where it will be possible to set the data settings
of the network server

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 206
Configuration screen network server

In this environment it will be shown all the necessary parameters to configure the network
server and the connection that the controller will have to establish to secure the access to
the shared files.

IP Address The IP address of the network server.

Shared Folder The name of the folder present on the server and set with the
property of network sharing

Read-only Indicates if the shared folder on the server has privileges to read-
only (writing operations are not allowed).

Username Indicates a possible user name to use when the server requires a
login to the connection.

Password Specifies the password to use for the user set.

Once entered the necessary data, it will be necessary to close the environment with the
consent . Of course at the exit from the environment the software will attempt to establish
the connection with the server set and, in case of problems, a window messages will show
the information about the errors occurred.

Once properly configured the server, it will be able to access to the shared folder from any
file selection screen.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 207
Example of file display from network folder

Also, once configured the server to load programs from the network, a new button will be
displayed inside the main screen of the software.

Main screen of the software with programs loading from network enabled

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 208
From this button it will be possible to force a reconnection operation to the server
by the user. This operation can be useful in case of abnormalities in the connection to the
server and that can be reset or verified with a reconnection attempt.

4.24 Alarm history display

The software offers the management of an alarm history that is used to display all alarms
and emergencies presented in the software. The alarm history is updated each time an
alarm is detected by the software. If the system is in an alarm status, it will not be
possible to make movements of the axes and marking cycles until the reported alarm has
not been restored.

Below is a list of the alarms processed and displayed by the software:

• Alarm stop from user: alarm recorded when the user presses the stop moving
or stop cycle ;

• Thermal alarm: alarm recorded when a thermal alarm occurs in the controller;

• Power on alarm: alarm recorded when the user presses the power off button on
the controller;

• User Abort alarm: alarm recorded in case of stop by the user though an external
button connected to an appropriate input;

• Abort print alarm: alarm recorded in case of stop by the user through a
command from a logic signal;

• Laser System ok alarm (only for laser): alarm recorded when the digital input
of laser system ok is not high. The laser is not connected or powered;

• Laser Armed alarm: (only for laser): alarm recorded when the input of armed
laser is not high. The laser was not armed after the laser enable output was raised

• Axis out of area alarm: alarm recorded when there is a stop in the program
execution if one of the axes is outside the checking area of the program itself .

• Solenoid valve short circuit Alarm: alarm recorded when the firmware detects
a short circuit on the solenoid.

• Motor short circuit alarm : alarm recorded when the firmware detects a short
circuit on the motor.

• Modbus motor alarm: alarm recorded when an alarm occurs on a modbus motor

• Modbus motor : alarm recorded when in case of any anomaly on a Modbus motor.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 209
It is possible to display the alarms history from the auxiliary functions environment. The
history is visible from all users, and with any operating level. Operations such as the
cancellation of an alarm or reset of the full history is only accessible by the manufacturer
user.

To display the alarm history:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, press the history markings button;

History alarm button

2. A screen with a table showing all the alarms in the software will be displayed:

Display screen of the alarm history

For each alarm, it will be displayed a description of the alarm with its unique identifier ,
the date and time when this alarm has been recorded, the type of head selected at the
moment of the alarm has been recorded, the selected user level and the program
uploaded when the alarm was recorded.

Display screen of alarm history for manufacturer user

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 210
4.25 System statistics display

The software stores in its memory a set of statistics to display a series of useful data for
the software management and maintenance. The stored statistics are referred to the
timing of implementation of the software, processing times, number of execution of
marking cycles, etc..

It is possible to display the statistics of the system from the auxiliary functions
environment. The statistics of the system are visible to all users and with any operating
level. Resetting operations of the statistics are only accessible to the distributor user (for
partial cancellation) or to the manufacturer user (complete cancellation).

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, press the system statistics button;

System statistics button

2. It will be displayed a screen showing all the system statistics referred to the
execution time and the programs stored in the controller memory;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 211
Display screen of the system statistics

The system statistics are divided into: system execution times , system maintenance
dates and programs execution.

Display page execution times

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 212
The execution times are divided into total times and partial times. The total times
concern the total system performance, i.e. the total actual time in which the
software run. The partial time is the time of the current execution of the system,
i.e the time from which the system was booted. The total time considers all the
partial times of execution.
The partial and total execution times are divided into standby time, marking time
and total time. The marking time indicates the actual time of the marking cycle;
the standby time indicates the time when the software is started but is not marking
and the total time indicates the sum of the marking and standby times.

The total execution times cannot be reset by any operative level, on the contrary
the partial execution time can be reset both by the distributor and by the
manufacturer.

Display page of execution times for distributor/manufacturer user

To reset the partial execution time, just press the reset button on the side of the
table and confirm the cancellation request.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 213
Display page of programs execution

The statistics concerning the program executions are useful to display how many
times the individual program present in the memory have been performed. In the
statistics programs table it is possible to see all the programs in the memory of the
controller with their execution statistics. The statistics of a program are referred to
the number of executions and the percentage of executions of that program in
relation to the total executions number .

The user with manufacturer operation level can change the number of partial
executions of the programs.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 214
Display page of programs executions for manufacturer user

To reset the number of partial executions of the programs, just press the reset
button on the side of the text box where the number of the performed program is
displayed and confirm the cancellation request.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 215
4.26 Backup of the system data

The software allows to create backup files from which it is possible to restore the system
data status at any time. The backup files can also be saved on a USB key and carried out
of the controller. It is also possible to load a backup from the USB key to restore the data
of the system to the previously settings saved.
From the backup environment it is possible to delete the system data. The data that can
be deleted are only those that are saved on the controller memory.

In order to perform system backups or restore software settings, it is necessary to set the
user operating level on distributor or manufacturer or supervisor .

Following are the data that can be stored in the backup:

• Software General parameters;

• Axis parameters;

• Heads store;

• Software general configurations (Omni serial number, Shift codes , Year codes , etc.)

• Statistics;

• Programs;

• Bitmap images;

• DXF drawings ;

• TTF fonts;

• Maintenance machine parameters;

• Languages;

• Custom Fonts;

• Markings history;

• CSV;

• Machines database.

• Virtual keyboards

• Printer

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 216
• Markings check

To perform the system data backup:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, push on the backup button;

Backup button

2. A screen showing all the possible backup to generate or restore will be displayed;

c.

a.

d.

e.
b.

f.

Screen management of system backup

a) Button for the selection of all backup parameters;

b) Button for deselection of all backup parameters;

c) Button for the cancellation of the backup selected parameters;

d) Button for the creation of the backup selected parameters;

e) Button for the backup restoring of the selected parameters;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 217
f) Exit button from the backup environment

Here it is possible to select the backup parameters that can be managed for the
backup, cancellation or restoring operations

3. Select the parameters to perform a backup operation by pressing on the parameter or


selecting all the parameters using the appropriate button

4. Once selected the parameters, press the button related to the operation to execute:

• Cancel the selected parameters: cancelling the selected parameters, it will


be possible to reset all the parameters settings
. WARNING

In case of cancellation of the selected


parameters, all the data of that parameters in
the controller will get lost. Ensure to have a
backup of that parameters before proceeding
with the cancellation.

NOTE
It is not possible to cancel all the TTF from the
backup. To cancel the TTF it is necessary to enter
the TTF management environment from
environment of file management.

• Backup of the selected parameters: the selected parameters will be


saved on the USB key plugged in the controller.

At the moment of the backup of the selected data, a request of entering the
name to save it will be displayed. In this way it will be posssible to save more
backup of the software configuration and every backup will have a different
name chosen by the user.
The backup will be named with the heading " mcs_<name>” where <name>
will be entered by the user.

Request window of backup name insertion

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 218
NOTE
In case a backup with the same name is
already on the key, it will be requested to
replace the file. To proceed with the saving,
confirm the request, otherwise the saving of the
backup it will be cancelled.

• Restoring the selected parameters: the selected parameters will be


loaded from the USB key plugged in the controller and then saved in the
controller memory.

When restoring a backup, a window will display all the backups stored in the
USB key plugged into the controller.

Screen of backup selection

WARNING
Restoring the selected parameters, all the data
of that parameters present at the moment in
the controller will get lost. Make sure to have
a backup of that parameters before restoring.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 219
5. Once selected the operation to perform, the software will display a report screen with
the requested operations indicating the success or failure of the operation itself.

Backup selection screen

The backup environment is also very useful for loading "standard" data in the controller.
Just create a set of parameters, make the backup and load it on the controller . In this
way the controller will be already set a in a working configuration of the software.

4.27 System update

The software update is very important in the controller management. The software,
firmware and kernel update can be requested for various reasons (f.e. to add a new
functionality to the software) and it is necessary to be able to complete the update
process correctly.

The system update is based on the update file loading from the USB key. The update files
are:

• mcs – file containing the software update;

• uImage – file containing the kernel update;

• FEAU100.dat – file containing the firmware update;

• escript – folder that contains the script to update the operating system

To upgrade the software, it is necessary to have these files in the USB that will be
plugged into the controller.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 220
To upgrade the system, it is necessary to be as distributor or manufacturer user, as the
updating operations are extremely delicate and require special attention during the
upgrade phase:

To upgrade the software:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, press the about button;

About button

2. It will be displayed the info screen on the software versions;

Display screen system information

Press the button of software update to access to the upgrade screen.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 221
NOTE
The upgrade screen is protected by a password
provided by the manufacturer. Please insert the
password to update the software.

3. In the update screen, select to update.

Update screen

Once selected the files to update, press the start button.

WARNING
In case of upgrade of the kernel, of the
firmware or if performing an upgrade script,
once completed the upgrade, the system will
have to be restarted. In this case, the
controller will have to be switched off and on.

4.28 Display of free memory

From the information system environment, it is possible to display the space occupied in
the memory by the programs , DXF, TTF and settings present in the controller. The
display of the free disk space is allowed to all user levels.

To see how much free memory is available:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 222
1. From the auxiliary functions screen, press on the about button;

About button

2 . It will be displayed the info screen with the software versions;

Display screen of the system information

3.Press the memory management button to display the information about the occupied
memory space in the controller;

Memory occupancy button

4. A new window showing the graphic and the percentages of the memory occupancy
will be displayed;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 223
Display screen showing the space occupied in the memory

This screen will display all the information about the memory occupation divided by type
(TTF fonts, Custom Fonts, images, programs, images, history, etc.) and it will be possible
to view which one of these types is more expensive in terms of memory occupation.

4.29 USB and external mouse management using USB Key

The software allows the USB mouse and keyboard management to insert in the
appropriate USB port on the controller. The system also supports the presence of a USB
HUB , to make possible the use of keyboard and mouse at the same time.

The mouse does not require any configuration by the user, while the keyboard needs to
be configured through the appropriate mapping. To set a mapping it is necessary to enter
the general software parameters and change the parameter USB Keyboard mapping. See
the general settings parameters in this manual for additional details.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 224
Example of connection mouse and keyboard

4.30 Markings history display

The software keeps in memory a series of data to view the history of the marked
programs. This allows to go back to the markings made in a certain day and at a certain
time.

It is possible to display the markings history from the environment of the auxiliary
functions. The history is visible to all users and with any operating level. History resetting
operations are accessible only to the user with operating level as manufacturer ,
distributor or supervisor.

It is possible to enable the management of the advanced history that allows to store and
display in a second time also the information of the fields marked for each program. The
enabling of this management involves a bigger amount of data, consequently the use of
the controller resources will increase.

To display the markings history:

1. From the auxiliary function screen, press the markings history button;

Markings history button

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 225
2. A window will display the markings history performed on the controller;

Markings history display screen

The markings history is divided into pages to facilitate the data reading. The information
of the various records are displayed in the drop- down menu in the upper right corner of
the history table. To change the displayed records page simply select a different page in
the same menu.

To delete all history:

• Press the button ;


• Confirm the delete request.

In case of setting of the parameter Maximum number files history ( see description of the
general system parameters) the images saving management of the marked programs will
be enabled. With this function it will be possible to save an image file ( PNG) that will
contain the full preview of the program just marked. This is a useful tool for tracking the
marking fields for every program.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 226
The markings history files are stored in the marking controller memory and can be copied
on a USB key from the history image environment management.

To enter the history image environment management press the button:

History image management button

In the environment of image management are displayed all the current images stored in
the controller memory :

Management screen of history images

The possible operations in this environment are those of cancellation of an image file or
saving files on USB key.

Image files are saved in order to identify the date and time of the execution of the
marking program:

<programname>_<date>_<time>.png

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 227
WARNING
If the number of history files reaches the value
parameter maximum number history files, a
warning message will be displayed at the start
of a new marking cycle.
This message will be displayed until the history
will not be emptied.

WARNING
The parameter saving type history file can
affect the history file. If it is set to SINGLE
FILE and if the marking program is executed
another time after a history file has been saved,
this will not be saved. See the general settings
parameters in this manual for additional details.

The following picture is an example of a saved image for markings history:

Example of image file of the markings history

In the case of enabling of the advanced markings history it will be possible to


enable/disable and customize filters about the history data. It will be also possible export
in CSV format the table of the current history to have a report about the data stored in the
controller.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 228
Screen of advanced marking history

To apply a filter to the history table just push the filter configuration button:

Filter configuration button

It will be displayed on the screen an environment that will allow to configure the filter to
be applied on the table.

Screen of filter configuration

To configure the filter, it will be possible to enter a text that will be researched on the
fields selected in the drop-down menu. It is possible to specify the filter to apply to all
fields, or to one in particular.
On the selected fields it will be searched the text that has been specified and , if this is
present even if only in part, the program will be considered to be displayed.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 229
For example: setting to search the text "test" in all the fields of the program. This will
include all programs that contain the text "test" in the name of the program ("marking
test”, "prog_test", etc.) or as a field marked.

It is also possible to search and filter all the programs containing a particular flag field
(for example, "% s").

Finally it is possible to export history markings in CSV format. The export will work on the
current configuration of the history, with or without filters, and the result will be saved on
USB with the name:

export_<date>_<time>.csv

To make the export of a markings history just press on the appropriate export button :

Export button

By pressing the button, it will be required to proceed with the operation or not. In order
to continue, it will be necessary to confirm this request. For very large size history content,
it would may need some time to complete the operation. At the end of the export, a
confirmation message of the successful saving on USB will be displayed.

WARNING

The export of the history file will be possible only on


USB key ; in order to perform this operation, it will
be necessary to insert a USB key in the controller.

NOTE

The size of the data stored in the markings


history affects the displaying and processing
performances of the history. The filters bring
further heaviness in the phase of displaying
and processing.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 230
When enabled the function of programs loading from a shared network folder, it will be
possible to export the history directly into the shared folder. Also, if enabled the parameter
of automatic export of the history, it will be automatically generated a file inside the
shared folder containing the markings that are in the history

NOTA
The file of the automatic export s automatically
updated every 5 minutes

4.31 Virtual keyboards management

The software allows to manage custom virtual keyboards with dynamic mappings created
by the user. The mapping of a virtual keyboard is based on a standard XML file from which
it is possible to add, edit or delete any character to use it the AC500 controller.

Obviously virtual keyboards can be used to edit text fields of the marking programs.

NOTE
Virtual keyboards use a UTF-8 encoding and then it
is allowed to use non-ASCII characters. However, in
case of insertion of a text to be marked with non-
ASCII characters, it will be necessary to use a TTF
font or a custom font as the font proprietors
entered into the software handle only ASCII
characters.

Virtual keyboards can be inserted from the file management environment and can be set
from the general data environment. Obviously, the parameter setting of the general data
will change the display of the keyboards presented in the software (be careful, some
keyboards do not use custom mappings).

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 231
Example of virtual keyboard with Cyrillic mapping

4.32 Board versions

On the controller AC500 there are 3 different hardware versions called: Board A , Board B.
and BOARD C. The software can automatically recognize which one is present in the
controller.

Board B

The Board B is the BOARD of the previous hardware revision in which were made some
improvements for the axis control of the marking head and other important improvements
for the use of the marking system (and corresponding functionalities).
The most interesting feature concerning this board is the control of the third axis that can
be done in logic (control to the external drive) or power (directly to the motor). While the
Board A can manage only the SWITCHING control in the third axis, the Board B is
configurable (both HW and SW) following the instructions here below.

The configuration is done via four jumpers located on the power board (EAU110B-0), near
the head connector (in addition to a sw parameter ).

JUMPERS MODIFICATION PROCEDURE ( BOARD B )

• disconnect the power


• remove the rear cover and screws, and separate the two boards1

1
Remove and re-insert the boards with attention to the connectors and handle the boards by the edges

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 232
• set the four jumpers in logic mode ("L") or power ("P"), as described below:

"L" = mode logic (default)

"P" = power mode

• reassemble the boards, the screws and the cover


• set the general parameter "Type third axis" to "STEP / DIR" (logic mode) or
"SWITCHED" (power mode)

The Board B as already mentioned allows more functions than the Board A and these are
all listed in the manual.

Board C

The Board C is the latest revision board integrating further improvements and
optimizations together with the possibility to control the XY axes in logical mode. This
particular configuration is necessary to use a controller to control a machine with scribe
head. As for the management of the third axis in the logic already implemented in the
previous Board B, in order to use XY axes in logic particular HW / SW configurations are
necessary . Below the configurations in detail.

JUMPERS MODIFICATION PROCEDURE ( BOARD C )

• disconnect the power


• remove the rear cover and screws, and separate the two boards2 in case of first
revision of the board (EAU110C-0) with internal jumpers
• set the jumpers as for instructions on the board

2
Remove and re-insert the boards with attention to the connectors and handle the boards by the edges

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 233
As evidenced by the screen printing
Board , these are the possible
jumper settings for the three axes.

In this example , in order to configure


the management of the scribe head,
striscio, it will be necessary to set the
jumpersas indicated for XL and YL.

• rimontare le schede, le viti ed il coperchio


• impostare nel sw la configurazione della testa a striscio da magazzino teste

Infine è possibile consultare l'ambiente di informazioni del sistema per capire quale Board
è presente sulla centralina in uso.

NOTE: for the board EAU110-1 it was possible to set the jumpers externally without being
obliged to remove the two boards of the controller. In this case the jumpers will be
inserted in the same way (then inserting the jumpers in a specular way from the back of
the board).

• reassemble the boards, the screws and the cover


• set in the sw the configuration of the scribe header from head store

Finally, it is possible to consult the information environment of the system to understand


which board is present in the controller in use.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 234
Display screen system information

NOTE
It is necessary to pay attention to the Board
mounted on a controller because the different board
revisions need different firmware versions. A wrong
firmware installed on a board could cause a failure
of the system.

WARNING

Do not mount boards on logic boards


with different versions each other . A
mother board revision A IS NOT
COMPATIBLE with a board B/C, etc

CHAPTER 5

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 235
4.33 Printer settings configuration

After enabled the printer management from parameter in the General Data, it will be
possible to access to the environment of the printer configuration connected to the
controller via serial.

NOTE

In case of use of one of the features for the fieldbus


or Modbus motors, it will be impossible to use the
printer. In this case it will be necessary to disable
these features to have an available COM

To enter the printer configuration environment:

1. From the screen of the auxiliary functions, push the button of the system setup
settings;

System setup button

2. A screen will show with the possible system parameters that can be modified;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 236
Configuration screen of the system parameters

To enter the printer environment setup, simply press on the access button

Printer configuration button

1. The software will display a screen to the screen showing all the settings about the
printer and it will be possible to have access to the labels configurator :

Example of screen of printer configuration

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 237
On the left side of the screen it will be displayed the settings concerning the serial port
connected for the printer in use.

To access the labels configurator, simply press the access button:

Labels configuration buttom

After pressing the button, a screen for the configuration of the labels print will be
displayed:

Example of screen of labels configuration

The columns of the configurator table contain the parameters that must be set to handle
the labels printing.

• La first column indicated the TYPE of print. It is possible to choose among TEXT,
BARCODE UPCA, BARCODE AN13, BARCODE 128 and IMAGE.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 238
• The second column contains the TEXT to print. In case of TYPE set to IMAGE in this
column, it must specify the name of the image present on the memory of the
printer to be loaded.

• The third column contains the FIELD to print. It is possible to select PROGRAM to
print the name of the marking program or IDFIELD indicating in the next column
the number of the field to print.

• The fourth column contains the number of the field to print and will be enabled
only in the next column by selecting the option IDFIELD.

• The fifth column contains the coordinate of X axis.

• The sixth column contains the coordinate of Y axis.

• The seventh column contains the value concerning the text width indentified by W.

• The eighth contains the text value identified by H.

• The ninth column indicates the ROTATION of the text or of the barcode to print. It
is possible to choose among 0°, 90°, 180° and 270°.

• The tenth and last column indicates the type of FONT to use for the text. It is
possible to choose : STANDARD, REDUCED and BOLD.

In the same screen it will be possible :

• Perform a text print using the button

• Load a configuration file using the button

• Save a configuration file using the button

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 239
CHAPTER 5

Test and system calibration

The software allows to launch an axis calibration and test the system. The calibration of
the axes is not an operation that must be absolutely performed by the operator, since it is
performed by the software whenever the system is set to the online status. The system
test is instead an essential part in the system setup, because in this environment it is
possible to verify the function of the digital inputs and outputs, of axis frequency outputs
and the parameters and connections of the machine. Therefore, the system test is always
the first operation to be performed during the controller mounting phase on the machine.

5.1 System Test

The test environment is used to analyze and control the basic operation of the controller
connected to the machine. If the test does not work, it means that there are problems in
the connections of the machine, therefore it is necessary to check and fix the potential
problems to mark successfully. It is possible to test even the digital inputs and outputs,
the axis frequency outputs and the working area of the system.

To test the system, the user level must be distributor or manufacturer.

To enter the system test, just press the test button on this screen of the auxiliary
functions.

Test button

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 240
The test screen will be as follows:

System Test screen

The screen is composed of different boards, incorporating all the elements necessary to
test the system. The boards present in the test environment are:

• Inputs
It is possible to test the operation of the digital inputs of the machine.

• Outputs
It is possible to test the operation of the digital outputs of the machine.

• Frequency
It is possible to set a frequency and verify if the selected axis moves correctly.

• Marking area
It is possible to perform a test of the working area based on the working
parameters set.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 241
5.1.1 Test of the digital inputs

In order to test the digital inputs it is necessary to select the digital input board present in
the system test environment .

In this board there is a table showing all the inputs handled by the software. Each row of
the table corresponds to an input connected to the controller and the rows are composed
of two columns, one for the description and one to display the current status of the digital
input.

Table of the digital inputs

If the status cell is empty, it means that the input current status is closed; if the cell is
colored, it means that the input current status is open.

Current status of the input : close

Current status of the input : open

5.1.2 Test of the digital outputs

In order to test the digital outputs it is necessary to select the digital input board present
in the system test environment .

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 242
In this board there is a table showing all the outputs handled by the software. Each row of
the table corresponds to an output connected to the controller and the rows are composed
of two columns, one for the description and one to display the current status of the
digital output.

Table of the digital outputs

If the cell is empty, it means that the current status of the output is closed; if the cell is
colored, it means that the current status of the output is open.
Display table of digital outputs

If the status cell is empty, it means that the current status of the output is closed while if
the status if the cell is colored it means that the current status of the output is open.

Current status of the output : close

Current status of the output : open

5.1.3 Test of the frequency outputs

To test the frequency outputs it is necessary to select the frequency outputs board,
present in the test system environment.

In the test frequency outputs board there are some parameters that, if properly set, allow
to test whether the machine axes are moving properly. It is possible to set a value in
frequency and in the movement direction in which of the selected axis. The axis
movement depends on the parameters set in the axis parameters.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 243
Test page of frequency outputs

Using the back and forward buttons it is possible to select the axis movement direction
and set the frequency to move the axis. Depending on the axis frequency set, the X axis
will move , if set a frequency in the text box of the X axis; otherwise the Y axis will move,
if set a frequency in the text box of the Y axis. To set a frequency, just press the + and -
buttons to increase or decrease the current rate of one step of 100 Hz. Frequency can be
set also pressing the text box of the axis to move. The axis will move in the direction
selected.

CAUTION
Before moving the axis, be sure to have set
the axis parameters correctly. The result of an
incorrect movement may be due to the setting
of incorrect data.

CAUTION
During the test, the axis are not controlled by
the software. Therefore, no checks will be
made on the possible placement inside the
maximum and minimum values. Pay a special
attention while performing this operation and
stop the movement before reaching the
extreme values.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 244
2.

2.
1 3.

4. 5. 6.

1. Button to select the back movement;


2. Button to stop the movement (reset of the set frequency value);
3. Button to select the forward movement ;
4. Button to decrease the set frequency value;
5. Text box to display and set the frequency;
6. Button to increase the set frequency value.

WARNING

With the test of the frequency outputs, the


marking head moves. Before confirming
the command, make sure to have complied
with all the safety precautions for the
operator, who must leave free the head
working area.

5.1.4 Test of the working area

The test of the working area allows to control the limits of the working area. The limits of
this area are defined according to the parameters set in the general parameters. In this
test, it will be possible to move the axes automatically to the four boundaries of the
working area The software will display the current positions of the head.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 245
Test screen working area

To start the marking area test, press the start button.

In this test, the axis will move at the speed set in the general parameter speed test
working area. Be sure to have set the parameter in the correct way, before starting the
test.

WARNING

By testing the frequency outputs, the


marking head moves. Before confirming
the command, make sure to have complied
with all the safety precautions for the
operator, who must leave free the head
working area.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 246
5.2 Axis calibration

The calibration of the axes is an operation performed every time the online status is set.
Therefore, as mentioned earlier, it is optional for the operator. The calibration of the axes
is necessary to calibrate the axes and is carried out according to the axes parameters set.
When calibrating, the axis will move according to the set direction, searching for the limit
switch. Once reached the limit switch, the calibration value set in the parameters will be
the one set in the parameters. If, during its calibration, the axis is already on its limit, it
will displace according to the parameter of calibration output value, then it will be
calibrated again.

The axis calibration can be performed both by the distributor and by the manufacturer.

To perform the axis calibration:

1. From the auxiliary functions screen, press the axis calibration button;

Calibration button

2. This will open a screen where it will be possible to recall the axis calibration
performance;

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 247
Axis calibration screen

From the calibration screen it will be possible to launch the calibration of a single axis or
the complete calibration of the machine. In the calibration environment, it is displayed the
current value of each axis and the speed movement of the axis. he calibration can be
stopped calibration at any time.

1.

4.
2.

5.
3.

1) Label with the display of the axis of reference and the associated calibration priority;
2) Box with the current value of the axis;
3) Box with the current speed of the axis;
4) Button to start the axis calibration;
5) Button to reset the current value.

1. Button to launch the full calibration of the


machine;
2. Button to abort a calibration, both of the axes and
complete one.

1.

2.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 248
WARNING

With the axis calibration, the marking head


moves. Before confirming the command,
make sure to have complied with all the
safety precautions for the operator, who
must leave free the working area of the
head.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 249
CHAPTER 6
Connections and communications with the controller

In this chapter, it will be detailed all the various systems of connection and communication
with the AC500 controller. These systems allow to connect the controller with an external
terminal and the machine can be directly commanded by the terminal. The system
communications are:

 Logic signals

 Serial communications

6.1 Remote Communications

The control input / output signals and the possibilities of having the communication host
of the marking system allow the remote control of the marking head and all the marking
operations.

The I/O port allows the transmission of I/O signals between the controller and the I/O
remote device. The I/O device can can select remotely programs to load and start or stop
the marking cycle. Output signals from the marking system can be transmitted to the I/O
device to give an account of its status. For more details, please refer to the chapter of
logic signals.

The TTL I/O port allows to begin an operation of marking using a Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC) or simply connecting a device for checking the marking start. For more
details, please refer to the chapter on TTL signals.

The serial port allows to connect an host to the controller. Through the serial
communication RS-232 it is possible to transmit data, select the programs to mark and
check the operations of the marking head. The host communications can be of type RS-
485 to control a network of multiple marking heads connected to the same host. For more
details see chapter host communications.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 250
6.2 I/O Signals

The controller is originally configured to operate with I/O signals from 12 to 24 VDC. The
I/O port on the interface controller rear panel provides the access to the control circuit of
the marking cycle . In case of use of the I/O port , ensure that:

• The I/O signals are within the limits;

• The cables are shielded;

• The protective shield of the cable is limited (or to the connector DB15S of the
controller or to the source, not both).

INPUT LIMIT OUTPUT LIMIT


Voltage PNP/NPN: 12…24 Vdc Current 0.25A
Current 5mA Voltage 12…24 Vac/dac
Input signals Output signals

The timing of the three control signals of the head (START PRINT, READY and DONE) are
shown in the figure below:

Timing diagram of the Input/Output signals

READY and DONE are used to determine when the head is ready for the next command.
The head will recognize the START PRINT command (start marking) only when DONE and
READY are both active (on).

When the head receives a START PRINT command, both READY and DONE are disabled
(off).

DONE will return active after the marking is completed. READY will return active after the
head is returned to its parking position, provided that any parameters, for example of the
serial numbering, are within the limits set.

If the marking cycle is aborted (ABORT), DONE will be active (on), but READY will remain
off (off).

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 251
The PAUSE signal is used to indicate if the marking is in pause status. Normally the signal
is off (off) and is activated (on) whenever the marking cycle pauses. The pause marking
status may be due to a request of the user or to the presence of a pause field within the
program.

In the event that the management of signals DONE and READY is turned, see description
of the general software parameters, the operating logic is completely reversed, i.e. when a
signal appeared inactive (off), it will be active (on) and vice versa.

Timing diagram of the input / output signals (READY and DONE with inverted logic)

The I / O signals and their connections to the pins are described in the following table:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 252
PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 INPUT COMM All input (+ o -)
2 START PRINT Input: start marking cycle
3 ABORT Input: stop marking cycle
4 SEL_0 Input: see selection of the message in remote for more details
5 SEL_1 Input: see selection of the message in remote for more details
6 SEL_2 Input: see selection of the message in remote for more details
7 SEL_3* Input: see selection of the message in remote for more details
8 Not used
9 LASER SYSTEM OK Input: laser ok (only for laser machine)
10 LASER ARMED Input: laser armed (only for laser machine)
11 SEL_4 Input: see selection of the message in remote for more details
12 SEL_5 Input: see selection of the message in remote for more details
13 SEL_6 Input: see selection of the message in remote for more details
14 OUTPUT COMM All output (+ o -)
15 DONE Output: marking cycle completed
16 READY Output: ready for the selection of a program or start marking
17 PAUSE Output: marking cycle in pause
18 Available
19 LASER ENABLE Output: enable laser (only for laser machine)
20 LASER POINTER Output: enable laser pointer (only laser machine)
21 Do not connect
22 Do not connect
23 Do not connect
24 Do not connect
25 Do not connect

* signal SEL_3 can be configured to select the messages or to place the head online. Refer to the section
general parameters to have more details.

The following figure illustrates a simple closure contact for input signals using DC power
supplied by the customer

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 253
VDC input connections

The following figure shows the connections for the output signals using a DC power
supplied by the customer. To demonstrate the difference in polarity, the drawing shows
both the sourcing of the signals and the sinking of output.

Output VDC connections

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 254
6.3 Remote program selection

The remote program selection allows the system to monitor input decoded signals,
transmitted by a I/O device provided by the customer. These signals (from SEL_0 to
SEL_6) are received by the connector I/O controller. The combination ON/OFF of the
seven input signals generate binary decimal codes (BCD) in a range from 0000000
1111111 to. Each BCD value corresponds to a specific name of a program stored in the
controller. When receiving input signals from remote, the system interprets the BCD value
of the seven input signals and loads the corresponding program.

The signal SEL_3 can be configured for the remote selection of the programs or to put
the head online .
If configured to put the head online, its ON/OFF status will be ignored during the
selection of the programs. If the marking head is already in the status of online but not in
marking cycle and the ON status is read, the marking head will re-launch the homing
procedure. Please refer to the chapter of the general parameters for more information. If
SEL_3 is set as online for the marking head, it will be possible to select only 63 programs
remotely . Obviously in this case, the SEL_4 will behave like the SEL_3, the SEL_5 like
SEL_4 and so on.

Reserved names of the programs correspond to 127 ( or 63 or in the case of SEL_3


configured as online ) possible BCD values. To ensure a proper selection of the
programs, the programs stored in the controller and available for the remote
selection, must be identified with specific names.

NOTE

If all seven input signals are OFF, the resulting


value of BCD is 0000. This effectively disables the
remote selection of the programs so that they can
be loaded by the operator only from controller

For all details about all SEL possible combinations, consult the l table in Appendix C of this
manual

6.4 Check signal TTL Input

The input signals for the TTL I / O control are managed in the connector compartment in
the rear panel of the controller. The signals are designed to be used as Automator
optional devices, such as the remote Start / Stop button.

INPUT LIMIT
Voltage 5V
Current 0,5mA
Input signals

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 255
Input TTL signals and their pi connections are described hereunder:
PIN SEGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 MOTOX A1 Private
2 MOTOX A2 Private
3 MOTOX B1 Private
4 MOTOX B2 Private
5 MOTOY A1 Private
6 MOTOY A2 Private
7 MOTOY B1 Private
8 MOTOY B2 Private
9 MOTOZ A1 Private
10 MOTOZ A2 Private
11 MOTOZ B1 Private
12 MOTOZ B2 Private
13 48Vout Private
14 EV Private
15 PWM Private
16 AO Private
17 START Input 1: Start marking cycle
18 ABORT Input 2: Abort/Stop marking cycle
19 0Vdc Private
20 5Vout Private
21 FC X Private
22 FC Y Private
23 FC Z Private
Power Output Private
15Vdc/100mA version
of AC500-LS
24

25 GND Private
Connector of the motors port with TTL inputs

The figure below shows a simple contact closure for PRINT START and ABORT signals
using TTL I / O signals.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 256
Connections of the Input TTL signals

6.5 Host Communications

The serial port on the interface rear panel of the controller is capable of operating both as
RS-232 and as RS-485. The type of hardware (232 or 485) and the software protocol of
the marking system must match the serial device used for the communication.

The system software allows to set the test parameters, so that it communicates with the
host connected. For the maximum flexibility, the software works with a communication
protocol called extended protocol. The protocol is described below.

The interface RS-232 is often used with remote devices, such as host computers,
terminals or barcode scanners .
The RS-232 can be used with the extended protocol.

The RS-485 is normally used when the communication covers a long distance or when the
marking head is part of a network . The RS-485 interface is required to check, from an
host, multiple marking heads. When using the RS-485 communication interface it is
requested the use of the extended protocol.

The host port connections are described in the following table.

In the controllers with Board B or further revision there will be two additional TTL signals
(such as those on the motors port) that will allow to control a START cycle or ABORT cycle
ongoing. Obviously on a Board A these signals are not operated and will be considered as
n.c. in the pinout.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 257
PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 n.c.
2 RS-232 – RX RS-232 data to the controller
3 RS-232 – TX RS-232 data from the controller
4 START TTL Input 1: Starting of marking cycle (only Board B)
5 0Vdc
6 ABORT TTL Input 2: Abort / Stop the marking cycle(only Board B)
7 RS-485 – A
8 RS-485 – B
9 5Vout
GND Ground
Table serial port connector

6.6 RS-232 Interface

The RS-232 interface is often used with remote devices such as host computers, terminals
or barcode scanners. The RS-232 can use the extended protocol.

For connections to DTE equipments (see figure below, left), it’s necessary a standard RS-
232 PC cable to a PC with a DB25S connector suitable for matching with the PC serial port.

In order to create an interface cable, make sure that the cable is constructed using the
following criteria:

• Use a shielded cable.

• Use connectors with black metal shells or black welded shells.

• Weld the cable as follows:

The system supports handshaking XON / XOFF. When the system is unable to accept
serial transmissions, the XOFF character is transmitted. When the serial port is available,
the XON character is transmitted.
Similarly, if the serial port receives an XOFF signal during the transmission, this is
suspended until XON character is not received.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 258
Diagram of the RS-232 cables

WARNING
Don’t send data on the RS-232 of the controller
in the first 3 seconds from the device ignition.
It is recommended to start the data exchange
when the application is launched.

6.7 RS-485 Interface

The RS-485 is normally used in case of long distance communication or when multiple
marking heads are connected to the same host in a network. The RS-485 interface is
required in applications with marking heads in a network.
Whit the RS-485 interface it is necessary to use the extended protocol for communication.

In case of use of interface RS-485 please be sure that: :

• Shielded cables are used.

• The cable shielding is completed (or to the DB9 connector to the controller or to host,
but not for both).

When the heads are used in a network, a unique number of ID station must be assigned
to each one of them. The number of ID station is used by the communication protocol to
address the messages to a specific head.

6.8 Extended protocol

The extended protocol provides two ways of communication with the error checking. It 's
designed to ensure the security in the transmission of the communication with an
intelligent host device , using pre-defined message formats and sizes of response to type

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 259
messages. It also provides an handshaking to detect errors in transmitted messages,
making sure that data had been correctly received.

The extended protocol offers the possibility of network communications so that more
heads can be connected together to a single host. All communications are conducted in a
relationship master / slave in which only the host has the ability to initiate a
communication. The head communicates only through an answer.

Following paragraphs explain the format of the messages and the replies, of the messages
type and of the calculations Block Check Code (BCC).

Message format

The messages from the host computer to the marking head are transmitted in the
following format:

SOH TYPE [##] STX [DATA_TEXT] ETX [BCC] CR

where:

SOH START ASCII character (hexadecimal value 001H). The system ignores all the
characters received before the SOH character.

TYPE Single ASCII character that defines the type of the current message.

[##] Two digits, optional, decimal ASCII specifying the number of the ID station of
the marking head. In case of use of only one head, the ID field can be deleted
and will be set as value "00". For network applications, which use more than
one marking head, the value of the ID station is used to identify them
individually. In the networks of marking heads it is necessary to implement the
ID station value of the marking head. The value of the ID station must be
between 01 and 31.

STX
ASCII character of the text start (hexadecimal value 002H).
[DATA_TEXT] An optional field that may be required for certain types of message. This field
contains the actual data of the message.

ETX ASCII character of text end (hexadecimal value 003H).

[BCC] Block Check Code (BCC) generated and sent to improve the reliability of
identifying the errors.

CR ASCII character of carriage return (hexadecimal value 00DH).

Answer format

The head can answer to the host in one of the two following ways:

• If it is an error-free transmission, the marking head responds with an acknowledgment


massage (ACK) in the following format:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 260
SOH TYPE [##] ACK STX [DATA_TEXT] ETX [BCC] CR

• If the host has transmission errors, the marking head responds with a message of non-
acknowledgment (NAK) in the following format.

SOH TYPE [##] NAK STX [DATA_TEXT] ETX [BCC] CR

where:

SOH Start ASCII character (hexadecimal value 001H). The system will ignore al
characters received before the SOH character.

TYPE Single ASCII character that defines the type of the current message.

[##] Two digits, optional, decimal ASCII specifying the number of the ID station of
the marking head. In case of use of only one head, the ID field can be deleted
and will be set as value "00". For network applications, which use more than
one marking head, the value of the ID station is used to identify them
individually. In the networks of marking heads it is necessary to implement the
ID station value of the marking head. The value of the ID station must be
between 01 and 31.

ACK ASCII character recognition (hex value 006H). Sent if the message was received
in the correct format and with no errors. Note: this only recognizes that the
transmission of the communication has been successful. Therefore it does not
identify that the requested action was completed successfully

NAK ASCII character no recognition (hex value 015H). Sent if the message was
received with an error

STX ASCII character of text start (hex value 002H)

[DATA_TEXT] An optional field that may be required for certain types of message. This field
contains the actual data of the message.

ETX ASCII character of text end (hex value 003H).

[BCC] Block Check Code (BCC) generated and sent to improve the reliability of
identifying errors.

CR ASCII carriage return character (hex value 00DH).

If the host computer does not receive a reply from the marking system within three
seconds, it retransmits the original message. If it receives no reply after three attempts,
the host interrupts the sequence and declares the communication stopped.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 261
Types of message

The following message types are recognized by the marking system when using the
extended communication protocol:

Type 1 Overwrites the content of the specific field with the data received from host
message. If the field contains flags, they will be replaced and not upgraded.
This type of message uses the format: 1NN <string> where "nn" represents the
field number of the program and <string> represents the data to be included in
the field. The number of the field should be formed by two digits, so an initial 0
is required for the fields from 01 to 09
Type V Updates the variable text in the specific field with the data received from the
host message. This type of message uses the format: Vnn <string> where "nn"
represents the field number in the program and <string> the data to be
entered in the field. The specific field must contain a flag command (% # V) of
variable text (see the chapter in the manual). The number of the field should be
formed by two digits, so an initial 0 is required for fields from 01 to 09.
Updates the text in a specific table query with the data received from the host
Type Q message. This type of message uses the format: Qnn <string> where "nn"
doesn’t represent the field number of the program, but represents the number
of the query in the appropriate query table and <string> represents the data
to be inserted in the query . The number of the field should be formed by two
digits, so an initial 0 is required for fields from 01 to 09.
Type P Indicates that the data received from the host message compose the name of
the message to be loaded. If the message contains no data, the controller will
return the name of the program currently loaded at the time on the controller

Type O Places the head online.

Type G Indicates a marking cycle.

Type I This type requires the status of the output of the head. The head will return a
single hexadecimal value in hex to give the status report about the signals of
PAUSE, READY and DONE. The system will return a value in relation to
following signal status:

Return Value PAUSE DONE READY


0 Off Off Off
1 Off Off ON
2 Off ON Off
3 Off ON ON
4 ON Off Off
5 ON Off ON
6 ON ON Off
7 ON ON ON

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 262
Type S This type of message requires the error status of the head. The heads will
return a value that represents a particular type of error. Each type of error has
one or more messages that can be displayed on the controller when an error
occurs. For more information see the following table:
Error Type
Answer reply
Error message
0x0000 (no error)
ONLINE_ERROR
0x0001
Pause … Home position not found!
PATTERN_LOAD_ERROR
0x0002 Error in loading a message (Host)!
Message not found (Host): <name of the message>
DISALLOWED_NO_PATTERN
No message loaded!
0x0004
No message loaded for the marking!
No message loaded. Which Prepositioning?
DISALLOWED_OFFLINE
Not allowed! Head offline!
0x0008
Denied! Head offline!
Parking or Loading not allowed! Head offline!
PATTERN_FIELD_ERROR
0x0010 Text Variable not found!
Text/Arc Text/Matrix/ not found!
MARKER_ABORTED_ERROR
0x0020
Marking aborted!
0x0040 (not used)
PIX_OUT_OF_RANGE_ERROR
0x0080 Message pixels –Range error!
Field <number> - Range error!
SN_RANGE_ERROR
0x0200
Error! Serial number limits warning!
0x0400 (not used)

Type H

It allows to set the height of a field of text type proprietor own or TTF. For the texts
proprietors the set value will be referred to the mm and will maintain the aspect ratio of
width and height if necessary; for the TTF texts the value set will be used to set the points
of the current font.
This message type uses the format: HNN <string> where "nn" is the field number of the
program and <string> represents the value in string format to be used. The field number
must consist of two digits, so an initial 0 is required for the fields from 01 to 09.
Finally, this type of message will be usable only once unlocked its functionality in the
AC500 Store.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 263
Type C
It allows to set the position of a field of text type or arc text. The text type fields will
consider this value to change their position of justification point based on the past, while
for text-type arc fields the value will be used to change the position of the arc center. To
use this command on an arc text it must be built with an arc in degree mode.
This message type uses the format: CNN <string> where "nn" is the number of the
program field and <string> is the string value that should be used to extract the
information of the XY point to be used to place the text . The field number must consist of
two digits, an initial 0 is required for fields from 01 to 09. The string will necessarily have
to separate the XY value with a character ';' (For example 10; 10).
Finally, this type of message will be usable only once unlocked its functionality in the
AC500 Store.

Type D

It allows to set the diameter of a field of type arc text. To use this command on an arc
text it must be built with an arc in degree mode.
This message type uses the format: Dnn <string> where "nn" is the number of the field
program and <string> is the string value that should be used to set the arc diameter. The
field number must consist of two digits, an initial 0 is required for fields from 01 to 09.
Finally, this type of message will be usable only once unlocked its functionality in the
AC500 Store.

Type B

It allows to set the starting angle of a field of type arc text. To use this command on an
arc text it must be built with a bow in degree mode.
This message type uses the format: BNN <string> where "nn" is the number of the
program field and <string> is the string value that should be used to set the angle of the
arc. The field number must consist of two digits, an initial 0 is required for fields from 01
to 09.
Finally, this type of message will be usable only once unlocked its functionality on the
AC500 Store.

Block check code

A Block Check Code (BCC) is calculated by performing an addition between the eight bits
of the type and of the characters of text data. The calculated value is transmitted as an
ASCII decimal number with three digits (from 000 to 255). If the sum is greater than 255,
the most significant bit is redundant and is discarded. If the host system is incapable of
generating a code BCC, this can be omitted with the risk of unidentified errors in the i
data transmission.

The following example is typical of a transmission that includes the calculation of the BCC.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 264
To download the characters string "ABC123" to mark in the first field of following
program, first wait that the cycle marking is in progress.

The host sends the following message. (All data shown are in hexadecimal format)

SOH 1 STX 01ABC123 ETX 238 CR

where:

1 Message type.

01 Field number.

ABC123 Text string

238 Block Check Code (BCC).

The BCC code is calculated as follows:

1. Add the character of the type of message + text characters (a +01 + ABC123):

Hexadecimal
Character Description
value
1 031H Type of message
0 030H First digit of the field number
1 031H Second digit of the field number
A 041H First character of the text
B 042H Second character of the text
C 043H Third character of the text
1 031H Fourth character of the text
2 032H Fifth character of the text
3 033H Sixth character of the text
1EEH BCC sum

2. The system is only interested in the lower eight bits, so it discards the fifth digit of the sum
and keeps the two others, with the result in code BCC of EE (hexadecimal). If the hexadecimal
value is converted to decimal:

EE hexadecimal = 238 decimal

3. the decimal value is then converted to its equivalent ASCII representation (where '2 '= 032H,
'3'= 033H and '8 '= 038H). This is the BBC code transmitted. . The data transmitted by the
host for the entire message are (in hexadecimal):

001H 031H 002H 030H 031H 041H 042H 043H 031H 032H 033H 003H 032H
033H 038H 00DH

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 265
4. The head will reply with the transmission of :

001H 031H 006H 002H 003H 030H 034H 039H 00DH

equivalent to the following ASCII message:

SOH 1 ACK STX ETX 049 CR

Please note that, if the system has encountered an error in the receipt of the message
from the host, it would reply with a NAK character (015H) instead of the ACK character.
The value of BCC would not be changed because the characters ACK / NAK are not
included in the calculation of BCC.

6.9 Programmable protocol

Programmable protocol is used to communicate with one way communication devices (


without reply from the controller ) , such as for the barcode readers. It provides no error
checking or data recognition. The programmable protocol parameters define which
characters have to be analyzed and how to handle them during the marking operation.
These parameters are described afterwards,

NOTE
The host message may contain ASCII
characters that define the Start, Terminating
and Ignore chars within the transmitted data.
To identify these ASCII characters it is
necessary to specify their equivalent decimal
valu at the moment of the setting. For
information on the decimal or hexadecimal
codes of the ASCII characters refer to the table
of ASCII code in Appendix A of this manual.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 266
Configuration screen of programmable protocol

Start Character (Optional). Identify the ASCII character in the host message from
which the marking system will start counting the characters position.

Terminator Character. Identify the ASCII character in the host message that represents
the end of the transmitted string. The Terminator character is usually the ASCII character
of carriage return (CR, 13 decimal )

Position parameter. Identify the position of the character in the data string received
from where the marking system will start extracting data from the host message.

Length parameter (Optional if Terminator is used). Identify how many characters


must be extracted from the host message. The Position and Length parameters work
together to extract data from the host message.

Ignore character. Identify the character in the host message that the system should
ignore. The Ignore character is usually the ASCII line feed character ( LF, 10 decimal).

MSG TYPE. Identify the types of messages for the programmable protocol that define
how the system will use the data received from the host . Types are: P, V, 1, Q and
0(zero)

P Loads a specific pattern, identified by data extracted from the host message.

V Updates the first variable text field of the pattern loaded with data extracted from
the host message

1 Overwrites the content of the first text field of the pattern loaded with data
extracted from the host message. Note that if the field is containing flag
commands, these will be OVERWRITTEN, not updated.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 267
Q Updates the text of the first Query set in the table with the data extracted from the
host message.

0 Indicates that the host message will provide the information about the management
of the data received, This option allows more flexibility, giving the possibility to
select a program or to change the data , directly from host.
The host message must use the following format: Tnn<string>

Where:

T = P, V, 1 or Q indicate the message type.

nn = two digits number to indicate the field number or query table where data
must be inserted. This number is not used with message type P ( program
selection)

<string> = program name (message type P) or field data (Message types V,1 or
Q)

Echo mode

The Echo mode allows to send a string from the controller to the host every time a
marking cycle is finished. This mode uses special flag to extract data from the pattern or
to output ASCII characters.

To use the Echo mode it is necessary to set the programmable protocol as serial protocol
and to enable Echo feature .

Inside the Echo string parameters, the data to be sent to the host must be specified: :

• Use flag %##Q to indicate a specific field in the pattern, where ## indicates the
field number from 01 to 99 (see example below)
• Use flag %##C to indicate a single ASCII character, where ## indicates the
decimal value of the ASCII character. See appendix A for ASCII table.
• Use the command \n o \N to indicate an ASCII character of carriage return and a
line feed ASCII character
• Use the command \r o \R to indicate only and ASCII return character.

Examples

If case of marking with three fields:

field 01= SN:2004


field 02= 247-14:06
field 03= AUTOMATOR

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 268
If the parameters string of the Echo mode has been set as follows:

DATA=%1Q;%2Q%13C%10C

Data transmitted by the controller will be :

DATA=SN:2004;247-14:06<CR><LF>

If the parameters string of the Echo mode has been set as follows:

DATA=%2Q;%3Q\R

The data transmitted will be:

DATA=247-14:06;AUTOMATOR<CR>

6.10 Programmable protocol for USB barcode

The programmable protocol for USB barcode is used to communicate with USB barcode
devices. As for the serial programmable protocol, it doesn’t provide any error checking or
data recognition. The programmable protocol parameters for barcode define the
characters to be analyzed among the data received and how to handle them during the
marking operation. These parameters are described as follows:

NOTE
The message transmitted from the usb barcode
may contain ASCII characters that define the Start,
Terminating and Ignore chars within the transmitted
string. To identify these ASCII characters it is
necessary to specify equivalent decimal value,
when setting them. For information on the
decimal or hexadecimal codes of the ASCII
characters refer to the table of ASCII code in
Appendix A of this manual.

Warning

The USB barcode must be set as keyboard


simulation to function properly on your system.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 269
Configuration screen of programmable protocol for barcode

Start Character (Optional). Identify the ASCII character in the barcode message from
which the marking system will start counting the characters position.

Terminator Character. Identify the ASCII character in the barcode message that
represents the end of the transmitted string. The Terminator character is usually the ASCII
character of carriage return (CR, 13 decimal )

Position parameter. Identify the position of the character in the data string received
from where the marking system will start extracting data from the barcode message.

Length parameter (Optional if Terminator is used). Identify how many characters


must be extracted from the barcode message. The Position and Length parameters work
together to extract data from the barcode message.

Ignore character. Identify the character in the barcode message that the system
should ignore. The Ignore character is usually the ASCII line feed character ( LF, 10
decimal).

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 270
MSG TYPE. Identify the types of messages for the programmable protocol that define
how the system will use the data received from the barcode.

P Load a specific pattern identified by data extracted from the USB barcode message.

V Updates the first variable text field of the pattern with data extracted from the barcode
message

1 Overwrite the content of the first text field of the program loaded with data extracted from
the barcode message. Note that fields containing message flags will be OVERWRITTEN, not
updated.

Q Updates the text in the first query set in the table with data extracted from the barcode
message.

A Add to the first text marking field of the program loaded the data extracted from the
barcode message

N Select the next field of the current loaded marking program

C Launch the checking procedure of the characters of the program. The


received message contains the total theoretical number of characters inside the program,
including the characters of the name of the program, and these will be compared with the
real number of data present in the program. If the check fails, the program will be
reloaded.

0 Indicates that the barcode message will provide the information about the management of
the data just received. This option allows more flexibility in selecting a program or
modification of the data, directly from barcode.
The barcode message must use the following format: Tnn<string>

where:

T = Character indicating the message type.

nn (optional) = two digits number to indicate the field number or query text
table where data will be placed. In case of type message Pattern ( selection of a
program), this number is not used. If this value must be used, it is necessary to set
the parameter of ID Flied enabling.

<string> = pattern name (message type Pattern) or field data. Not requested for
message type Next.

In case of message type 0 (zero) it will be displayed a configuration screen showing the
different message types managed by the barcode. This allows to match an identification
character at each message type. At the moment of the analysis of the package; the
system will check the character of the message type, and in case on any correspondence

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 271
with the message types, the system will use the appropriate management of the data just
received.

To configure the message types press the following button

NOTE
The configuration button for the message types
is enabled only if message type 0 (zero) is
selected.

Message types screen configuration

This window displays all the different message types that the system can manage. For
each message it is possible to set the character included in the barcode message that
identifies the message type, the enabling of the management of each type of message
and if the specified character must be handled as a special character. By special character
it means a character that can be repeated many times inside the barcode message and
that must not be considered as message actual data.

• associated with the overwrite function of the content of a text field.

• Query: message type associated with the overwrite function of the content of a
Quer field.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 272
MESSAGE TYPES

• Pattern: message type associated with the program loading function

• Update: message type associated with the update function of a field of variable
text

• Overwrite: message type associated with the overwrite function of the content of
a text field.

• Query: message type associated with the overwrite function of the content of a
Query field

• Append: message type associated with the function of insertion at the end of the
selected text filed message read from the barcode. This message can be left empty
(“”) in order to handle as append message all the barcode not included in this type
of messages.

• Next: message type associated with the field selection function of next program.
It does not require any additional data. Extra characters won’t be considered

• Check: message type associated with the checking function of the program
characters. In the checking of the characters numbers it is also considered the
name of the program.

Following are some examples about the management of the messages types configured
for the barcode protocol.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 273
Example of message types configuration

Example (see above configuration)

• Supposing to receive the following message:

@TEST

The system will handle the message as Pattern (“@”) and will load the program named
TEST. Since the message has been declared as special, in case of receipt of messages
like:

@TEST@

the system will analyze all the characters defined for the type Pattern and will discard
them, so the program that will be loaded will be always named as TEST.

• Supposing to receive the following message:

The system will handle the message as Next (“@”) and will select the next field of the
marking program.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 274
• Supposing to receive the following message:

€131

The system will handle the message as Check(“€”) and will launch the check function of
characters number of the program actually loaded.

• Any other field will be handled as Append because the message type Update,
Overwrite and Query have been disabled.

Example of barcode using procedure

A possible barcode using procedure can be following:

• Load the program from the appropriate barcode;

• Set the data in the field using the appropriate barcode; change, if necessary, the
selected field to modify;

• Set the check of the marking program from the appropriate barcode

6.11 Remote check of the controller

The system allows to use a remote software to control the interface of the controller.
The application to use is VNC Viewer. The remote control works through an Ethernet
connection between the marking controller and any PC. The PC needs to be configured
properly to use VNC Viewer.

To use the remote control of the controller, it is necessary to connect the controller to a
PC through the Ethernet cable, open the VNC software and insert the IP address of the
controller.
The default IP address is: 192.168.0.14

VNC Viewer screen

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 275
Once configured the VNC Viewer software, press the Connect button to establish a
connection with the marking controller.

VNC Viewer screen with controller remote control

WARNING

When using the controller remote control,


all the machine functions will be
commanded. Make sure to have complied
with all the safety precautions before
starting a session of machine remote
control

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 276
Appendix A
Reference cross-ASCII - Decimal – Hexadecimal

The table below presents the standard ASCII characters with their equivalent decimal and hexadecimal. This
table can be useful when there are communications between the controller and host computer.
ASCII DEC HEX ASCII DEC HEX ASCII DEC HEX ASCII DEC HEX
NULL 0 00 SPACE 32 20 @ 64 40 ' 96 60
ctrl A SOH 1 01 ! 33 21 A 65 41 a 97 61
ctrl B STX 2 02 " 34 22 B 66 42 b 98 62
ctrl C ETX 3 03 # 35 23 C 67 43 c 99 63
ctrl D EOT 4 04 $ 36 24 D 68 44 d 100 64
ctrl E ENQ 5 05 % 37 25 E 69 45 e 101 65
ctrl F ACK 6 06 & 38 26 F 70 46 f 102 66
ctrl G BEL 7 07 ' 39 27 G 71 47 g 103 67
ctrl H BS 8 08 ( 40 28 H 72 48 h 104 68
ctrl I HT 9 09 ) 41 29 I 73 49 i 105 69
ctrl J LF 10 0A * 42 2A J 74 4A j 106 6A
ctrl K VT 11 0B + 43 2B K 75 4B k 107 6B
ctrl L FF 12 0C , 44 2C L 76 4C l 108 6C
ctrl M CR 13 0D - 45 2D M 77 4D m 109 6D
ctrl N SO 14 0E . 46 2E N 78 4E n 110 6E
ctrl O SI 15 0F / 47 2F O 79 4F o 111 6F
ctrl P DLE 16 10 0 48 30 P 80 50 p 112 70
ctrl Q DC1 17 11 1 49 31 Q 81 51 q 113 71
ctrl R DC2 18 12 2 50 32 R 82 52 r 114 72
ctrl S DC3 19 13 3 51 33 S 83 53 s 115 73
ctrl T DC4 20 14 4 52 34 T 84 54 t 116 74
ctrl U NAK 21 15 5 53 35 U 85 55 u 117 75
ctrl V SYN 22 16 6 54 36 V 86 56 v 118 76
ctrl W ETB 23 17 7 55 37 W 87 57 w 119 77
ctrl X CAN 24 18 8 56 38 X 88 58 x 120 78
ctrl Y EM 25 19 9 57 39 Y 89 59 y 121 79
ctrl Z SUB 26 1A : 58 3A Z 90 5A z 122 7A
ctrl [ ESC 27 1B ; 59 3B [ 91 5B { 123 7B
ctrl \ FS 28 1C < 60 3C \ 92 5C | 124 7C
ctrl ] GS 29 1D = 61 3D ] 93 5D } 125 7D
ctrl ^ RS 30 1E > 62 3E ^ 94 5E ~ 126 7E
ctrl _ US 31 1F ? 63 3F _ 95 5F DEL 127 7F

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 277
Appendix B
Configuration and use of Theta axis (rotational)

This chapter will set out in detail the configuration parameters and the using of the
optional Theta axis managed by AC500 controller. The optional Theta axis is used to add
further functions to the marking system proposed by AC500, in particular for marking
cylindrical parts or multiple faces.

The Theta axis is an optional axis that is switched with the standard Y-axis using a special
relay on the connector of the signals TTL I/O. This means that the Theta axis can be
commanded only if at that moment the Y axis of the machine is not commanded. The two
axis can co-exist but not controlled simultaneously. In the machine logic these axes will be
handled sequentially and in optimized way.

As mentioned above, the Theta axis allows to mark parts with cylindrical surfaces and
surfaces with multiple faces. There are two different modes to manage the working
differences between the two types : perpendicular mode (for cylindrical parts) and index
mode (for pieces with faces).

B.1 Enable and configure the Theta axis

The optional Theta axis works in combination with the rotational support for marking
cylindrical parts or multiple faces of hexagonal or square parts. The rotational support is a
mechanical spindle that holds and rotates the part to be marked. It is also possible to
adjust the attack of the spindle according with the size of the piece to mark. In order to
use the Theta axis it is absolutely necessary to make sure to have enabled and
configured the axis before using it.

To enable the Theta axis it is necessary to set the general data number 35 ("Third axis
Management”) on the THETA AXIS. For further details please refer to the section
"General parameters setting " in the manual.
Setting the value of the third axis management in this way, the management of the Theta
axis on AC500 will be enabled.

In the general parameters environment it is possible to set some parameters exclusive for
the Theta axis:

- Standard diameters pieceTheta Axis: parameter indicating the default diameter


of the piece to use during the creation of the program. This parameter is used in
case of marking of cylindrical pieces ( perpendicular mode).

- Working position Y theta axis: parameter indicating the position of the Y axis
during the marking cycle with Theta axis. This parameter is used for the
marking of cylindrical pieces (perpendicular mode).

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 278
Cylindrical
piece

Rotational
Stroke Y axis
support

Y working position

Stroke X axis

In the axis parameters it will be also displayed the environment for the setting of the
parameters concerning the optional axis. For further information about the axis
parameters please refer to the section “ Setting of the axis parameters” in the manual.

Screen of the axis parameters with enabled Theta

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 279
Screen of Theta axis parameters

B.2 Test of Theta axis

Once enabled the Theta axis management, it is possible to proceed with the normal test
procedure of the axis from the Test environment ( see section “ System test “ in the
manual.)
To test the Theta axis it is necessary to enter the test window of the frequency outputs:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 280
Test window of frequency outputs

and push the button to display the information concerning the frequency of Theta
axis:

Test window of Theta axis frequency outputs

From this window it is possible to proceed with all the instructions described in the manual
(see section “System Test ”).

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 281
B.3 Theta axis calibration

The theta axis calibration is made each time the machine status is set on online.
Therefore, as for the standard axis X and Y, it is optional for the user.
The calibration is necessary to calibrate the axis according with the parameters set. The
calibration procedure is the same of the standard axis. The axis will move according with
the calibration direction set searching the home limit switch. Once reached the home limit
switch, the calibration quote set in the parameters will be set as actual quote of the axis.
If at the moment of the calibration an axis is already on its home limit switch, the axis will
move according with the calibration output quote and will be then calibrated again.

The Theta axis is switched with the Y standard axis, for this reason it cannot be calibrated
with it. In case of Theta axis enabled, the complete calibration procedure of the machine (
status online) will be following:

CALIBRATION THETA
AXIS

Execution
end

CALIBRATION X-Y
AXIS

Execution
end

CALIBRATION END

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 282
NOTE
In case of setting of the general parameter Axis
in pairs at rest on Theta, the calibration order
will be reversed. In this case it will be controlled
first the calibration of the X and Y axes, only at
the end of these the calibration Theta axis will
be controlled.

For more information see the chapter "Setting


general data".

In order to proceed with the manual calibration of the Theta axis, it is necessary to enter
the environment of axis calibration ( see section “Axis calibration” in the manual).
Following will be the calibration axis environment:

Screen of axis calibration

To proceed with the calibration of the single Theta axis, it is necessary to push the button:

Button for optional axis calibration

This way the calibration screen will display the calibration information of the Theta axis:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 283
Calibration screen of optional axis

From this screen it is possible to proceed with the usual instructions already included in
the section “ Axis calibration” in the manual.

NOTE
It is possible to calibrate the axis even from the
complete calibration procedure of the machine.
In this case the calibration order of the axis will
be the one used for the “online” of the
machine.

B.4 Modify programs with Theta axis

In case of Theta axis enabling, the creation and edit environment of the programs will
adapt to display useful and necessary information to program properly the data programs
with the Theta axis management. All the normal functions of the edit environment of the
programs are available also in case of Theta axis enabling. Please refer to the chapter
“Create a program ” present in the manual.

Following will be the editor screen:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 284
Edit screen of the programs

In the screen of the general data of the programs, the processing parameters of the Theta
axis will be also available.

Screen of the general data of the program

To display the Theta axis data push the button under the label “ Theta Mode”:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 285
Button of Theta mode

The screen displayed will show the information concerning the working mode of the Theta
axis and the diameter of the piece to mark.

Configuration screen of Theta mode

Mode It defines the working mode of the Theta axis for the current
program. The settable values are: perpendicular, index and off.
In perpendicular mode (cylindrical pieces marking ) the Theta axis
will be used to rotate the piece mounted on the support , while X
axis will position for the marking to the coordinates calculated of the
several fields. This way the Y axis will not be used and will be
positioned , at the beginning of the cycle, in the position set in the
general parameter “ Y position Theta axis processing” .

With index mode (marking of pieces with faces) the Theta axis will
be used to rotate the piece mounted on the support, later both X
and Y axis will position for the marking to the coordinates calculated
of the several fields. This way the Theta axis will be used in case of
change of the theta positioning value between one field and the
other. Once positioned Theta, the X and Y axis will work in standard
mode.
In case of off mode the Theta axis will be disabled for the current
program and the machine will work in standard mode.

Piece diameter It defines the size of the piece to mark. On the basis of this value,
the system will calculate the rotational movements required to mark
the program on the circular surface of the piece.
The value of the piece diameter is used only for the perpendicular
working mode and not for the index mode.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 286
In the general data of the program it is possible to insert the parking quote where the
Theta axis will place at the end of a cycle or at a parking command.

For each field of the program it will be possible to set the quote for the Theta axis
positioning during the marking for the processing of the field. In case of perpendicular
mode for the Theta axis, the positioning fields Y axis will be disabled because not used ( in
fact at the beginning of the cycle the axis will be placed in the position set in the general
parameter “ Y position Theta axis working”).

Edit screen of the programs with preview

B.5 Manual environment with Theta axis

From the jog environment it is possible to move the Theta axis within its maximum limits
as for the X and Y axis. For further information about job movements consult the section
“Move the marking head” in the manual.

With the Theta axis enabled following jog screen will be displayed:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 287
Axis jog screen

To move the Theta axis from the jog screen it is necessary to push the button of the
display of optional jogs:

Display button of optional jogs

Following screen will open:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 288
Jog screen Theta axis

Now it is possible to follow the same instructions indicated in the section “ Move the
marking head “ to move the Theta axis.

B.6 Working environment with Theta axis

With the Theta axis enabling, the main screen of the software will be modified in order to
display the information concerning the Theta axis for the program actually loaded.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 289
Main screen with Theta axis enabled

All the functionalities of the main environment will be available also in case of Theta axis
enabling. For further information about the main environment management please refer to
chapter “ The operating system” of the manual.

Screen of main environment with Theta axis enabled

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 290
In case of Parking or Prepositioning movements, the logic of the Theta axis will depend on
the Theta mode set in the program actually loaded:

• Perpendicular mode:

In case of this mode the prepositioning will move the Y axis to working position (
general data “ Position Y Theta axis working”) and then will bring Theta and X axis to
the position quote of the first field to mark.

The parking will position first X and Theta to their parking quotes and then Y to its
parking quote.

• Index mode:

In case of this mode the prepositioning will move the Theta axis in the position
specified in the first field to mark and then will move X and Y with the normal
operation of the prepositioning on the field.

The parking will position first Theta to its parking quote and then will move X and Y
with the normal parking operation of a program.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 291
Appendix C
Table of remote selection of the programs

SEL_6 SEL_5 SEL_4 SEL_3 SEL_2 SEL_1 SEL_0 BCD Name of the
Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Resulting program
status status status status status status status value reserved
(None – function
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0000000
disabled)
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 0000001 PAT01
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 0000010 PAT02
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 0000011 PAT03
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 0000100 PAT04
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 0000101 PAT05
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 0000110 PAT06
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 0000111 PAT07
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 0001000 PAT08
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 0001001 PAT09
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0001010 PAT10
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 0001011 PAT11
OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 0001100 PAT12
OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 0001101 PAT13
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 0001110 PAT14
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 0001111 PAT15
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 0010000 PAT16
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 0010001 PAT17
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 0010010 PAT18
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 0010011 PAT19
OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 0010100 PAT20
OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 0010101 PAT21
OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 0010110 PAT22
OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 0010111 PAT23
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 0011000 PAT24
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 0011001 PAT25
OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 0011010 PAT26
OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 0011011 PAT27
OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 0011100 PAT28
OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 0011101 PAT29
OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 0011110 PAT30
OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 0011011 PAT31
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0100000 PAT32
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 0100001 PAT33
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 0100010 PAT34
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 0100011 PAT35
OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 0100100 PAT36
OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 0100101 PAT37
OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 0100110 PAT38
OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 0100111 PAT39
OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 0101000 PAT40
OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 0101001 PAT41
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0101010 PAT42
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 0101011 PAT43
OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 0101100 PAT44
OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 0101101 PAT45
OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 0101110 PAT46
OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON 0101111 PAT47
OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 0110000 PAT48
OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 0110001 PAT49

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 292
OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 0110010 PAT50
OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 0110011 PAT51
OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 0110100 PAT52
OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 0110101 PAT53
OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 0110110 PAT54
OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON 0110111 PAT55
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 0111000 PAT56
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 0111001 PAT57
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 0111010 PAT58
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON 0111011 PAT59
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 0111100 PAT60
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON 0111101 PAT61
OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF 0111110 PAT62
OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON 0111111 PAT63
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1000000 PAT64*
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 1000001 PAT65*
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 1000010 PAT66*
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 1000011 PAT67*
ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 1000100 PAT68*
ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 1000101 PAT69*
ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 1000110 PAT70*
ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 1000111 PAT71*
ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 1001000 PAT72*
ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 1001001 PAT73*
ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 1001010 PAT74*
ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 1001011 PAT75*
ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 1001100 PAT76*
ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 1001101 PAT77*
ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 1001110 PAT78*
ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 1001111 PAT79*
ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 1010000 PAT80*
ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 1010001 PAT81*
ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 1010010 PAT82*
ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 1010011 PAT83*
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 1010100 PAT84*
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1010101 PAT85*
ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 1010110 PAT86*
ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 1010111 PAT87*
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 1011000 PAT88*
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 1011001 PAT89*
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 1011010 PAT90*
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 1011011 PAT91*
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 1011100 PAT92*
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 1011101 PAT93*
ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 1011110 PAT94*
ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 1011111 PAT95*
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1100000 PAT96*
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 1100001 PAT97*
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 1100010 PAT98*
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 1100011 PAT99*
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 1100100 PAT100*
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 1100101 PAT101*
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 1100110 PAT102*
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 1100111 PAT103*
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 1101000 PAT104*
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 1101001 PAT105*
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 1101010 PAT106*
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 1101011 PAT107*

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 293
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 1101100 PAT108*
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 1101101 PAT109*
ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 1101110 PAT110*
ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 1101111 PAT111*
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 1110000 PAT112*
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 1110001 PAT113*
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 1110010 PAT114*
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 1110011 PAT115*
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 1110100 PAT116*
ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 1110101 PAT117*
ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 1110110 PAT118*
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 1110111 PAT119*
ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 1111000 PAT120*
ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 1111001 PAT121*
ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 1111010 PAT122*
ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 1111011 PAT123*
ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 1111100 PAT124*
ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 1111101 PAT125*
ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 1111110 PAT126*
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1111111 PAT127*
Remote messages selection

• The messages from PAT64 a PAT127 can be selected in remote mode if the input signal SEL_3 is configured for the
messages selection. Please refer to the chapter of the General parameters for further information. If SEL_3 is set
as online for the marking head, it will be possible to select only 63 programs with the remote selection. In this case
SEL_4 will behave like SEL_3, SEL_5 like SEL_4 etc.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 294
Appendix D
Table of alarms descriptions

ID Alarm Description Azione/Risoluzione


Alarm registered when the -
1 Stop from user user orders the abort of a
marking cycle
• Ensure there is not excessive absorption
by the motors;
• Check that the fan is turning and is not
Alarm registered in case of obstructed by external objects.
2 Thermal
thermal alarm in the controller. • Make sure there is enough ventilation to
ensure proper cooling of the unit;
• Turn off the unit and wait a few minutes
before restarting.
Alarm registered when the -
3 Power On user presses the Power Off
button on the controller.
Alarm registered in case of • Check to avoid the uncontrolled arrival of
stop from the user through an a 24V signal on pin number 3
4 Abort user
external button connected with (IN_ABORT) of the port I / O connector
the appropriate input.
• Check to avoid the uncontrolled arrival
of a 5V signal on pin number 18
Alarm registered in case of
(ABORT) of the motors port connector ;
5 Abort print stop from user through a
• Check to avoid the uncontrolled arrival of
command from logic signal .
a 5V signal on the pin number 6 (ABORT)
of the serial port connector;
• Controllare che il cavo di collegamento
Alarm registered when the
con la testa laser sia correttamente
digital input of laser system ok
6 Laser system ok collegato;
is not high. . The laser is not
• Controllare che la sorgente del laser sia
connected or powered. .
correttamente alimentata.
Alarm registered when the • Check that the connection cable with the
input of laser armed is not laser head is properly connected.
7 Laser armed high. The laser is not armed
after the enable output of the
laser has been raised.
Alarm registered at the stop of -
the execution of a program if
Axis outside the check
8 one of the axis is out of the
area.
boundaries of the check area
of the program.
-
9 Reserved

-
10 Reserved

• Check that the cable of the marking head


is securely connected to the motors port
Alarm recorded when the
of the controller ;
firmware detects a short circuit
• Check the motor cable integrity inside
on the motor X. Make sure
11 Short circuit X motor the marking head;
that the motors are connected
• Check that the motor is not damaged
and that there are no
(short circuit or open circuit);
problems with cabling.
• Check that the jumpers of output
management in power / logic are

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 295
correctly configured for the axis to be
controlled.

• Check that the cable of the marking head


is securely connected to the motors port
of the controller;
• Check motor cable integrity inside the
marking head;
• Check that the motor is not damaged
(short circuit or open circuit);
Alarm recorded when the
• Check that the jumpers of output
firmware detects a short circuit
management in power / logic are
on the Y motor .Make sure
12 Short circuit Y Motor correctly configured for the axis to be
that the motors are connected
controlled;
and that there are no
• Check that the switching relay of the
problems with cabling.
channel Y / Z is not blocked on the axis
command Z. It is possible to verify from
the test environment to check if it’s
available a Z axis, if it moves or, if
changing the output digital switching, a
mechanical noise coming from the unit is
heard.
• The alarm on the motor may be due to a
steps loss. Check that the axle is properly
configured for the load to be moved and
Alarm registered when an
act on the speed and acceleration /
alarm occurs on a modbus
deceleration ramps to avoid too abrupt
motor. In this case the motor
13 Alarm modbus motor movements and ensure the necessary
is in an emergency and it is
engine torque to make the movements:
necessary to reboot the
• • The motor alarm can be caused by a
controller.
drive overheating. This particular alarm is
automatically triggered by the drive in
case of temperatures of over 90 ° C.
• Check that the motor is properly
connected to the RS485 of the controller;
Alarm registered in case of any
• Check that the motor ID network is
fault on a modbus motor.
correct and that it is same to the one
When this emergency is
12 Modbus motor programmed on the drive;
displayed, the type of error
• • Check that the communication baud
and the motor id will be
rate set on the control unit to the RS485
displayed
channel (COM2) is the same as the
program on the drive.

known Hardware anomalies:

• BLUE LED OFF


- check power supply fuse;
- verify power LED on power supply.

In the event that none of these points related to known hardware anomalies are decisive
for the highlighted problem please contact the supplier for service.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 296
Appendix E
Touch Screen calibration procedure

To calibrate the touch screen, It is necessary to save on a USB Key an empty text file (
without any content inside) called calibrate. It is important that the file doesn’t contain
any name extension.

Once saved the file on the USB key, it is necessary to insert it in the controller and restart
it with the key still inserted. After the controller boot , the procedure of calibration of the
touch screen will start. At the end of the calibration, the application will start.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 297
Appendix F
Object Dictionary Modbus Slave function

For any reference on the types of commands (Type O, Type G, etc.). Consult the appropriate section on the
host via serial communication insofar as it concerns the extended protocol.

Address Object Type Description Rights


Online status setting of the system.
0x5000 Type O BYTE Writing the register with the value 1 the W
system online procedure will start
Start setting marking cycle
Writing the register with the value 1 the
0x5001 Type G BYTE W
procedure of marking cycle start will
begin.
0x5002 Type I BYTE Information request about outputs status R
Information request about the errors
0x5003 Type S WORD R
status
Type 1 Write Enabling writing command Type 1
0x5100 BYTE W
Word
Type 1 Write Field number to modify
0x5101 WORD W
Field number
Field value to modify Each register will
Type 1 Write contain two ASCII characters. In case of
0x5102-0x51FF WORD W
String character 0, the analysis of the value will
end.
Type 1 Read Field Field number to read
0x5201 WORD W
number
Field value to read. Each register will
Type 1 Read contain two ASCII characters . At the end
0x5202-0x52FF WORD R
String of the string, it will be inserted a 0
character.
Type V Write Enabling writing command type V
0x5300 BYTE W
Word
Type V Write Number of the field to modify
0x5301 WORD W
Field number
Field value to modify. Each register will
Type V Write contain two ASCII characters. In case of 0
0x5302-0x53FF WORD W
String character, the analysis of the value will
end.
Type V Read Field Field number to read.
0x5401 WORD W
number
Field value to read. Each register will
Type V Read contain two ASCII characters . At the end
0x5402-0x54FF WORD R
String of the string, it will be inserted a 0
character.
Type Q Write Enabling writing command Type Q
0x5500 BYTE W
Word
Type Q Write Query number to modify
0x5501 WORD W
Field number
0x5502-0x55FF Type Q Write WORD Query value to modify. Each register will W

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 298
String contain two ASCII characters. In case of 0
character, the analysis of the value will
end.
Type P Write Enabling writing command Type P
0x5600 BYTE W
Word
Value of the program to load. Each
Type P Write register will contain two ASCII characters.
0x5601-0x56FF WORD W
String In case of 0 character, the analysis of the
value will end.
Value of the program loaded at the
moment on the controller. Each register
Type P Read
0x5701-0x57FF WORD will contain two ASCII characters . At the R
String
end of the string, it will be inserted a 0
character.

Example head Online command

1. Writing of the value 1 in the register 0x5000.

Example command Start marking of the current program

1. Writing of the value 1 in the register 0x5001.

Example READING Field

1. Writing of the field number to read in the register 0x5201.


2. Registers reading 0x5202-0x52FF.

Register: 0x5202 0x5203 0x5204


ASCII value (Hex): 54 45 53 54 00 00
String: T E S T /0 /0

Example WRITING Field

2. Writing of the field number to write in the register 0x5101.


3. Registers writing 0x5102-0x51FF.

Register: 0x5102 0x5103 0x5104


ASCII value (Hex): 54 45 53 54 31 00
String: T E S T 1 /0

4. Writing of value 1 in the register 0x5100.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 299
Appendix G
Fieldbus Module EtherNet / IP

EtherNet / IP

EtherNet / IP(Ethernet Industrial Protocol) is a communications protocol developed by Rockwell


Automation, Managed by the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association(ODVA) and designed for use in
process control and other industrial automation applications.

quote from en.wikipedia.org

Description

EtherNet / IP is an application layer protocol treating devices on the network as a series of "objects".
EtherNet / IP is built on the Common Industrial Protocol(CIP), for access to objects from ControlNet and
DeviceNet networks.

EtherNet / IP can be used in automation networks Which can tolerate some amount of non-determinism.
This is Because Ethernet physical media might not have deterministic delays.

EtherNet / IP can be easily confused as a simple combination of Ethernet and the Internet Protocol.
Instead, it is an industrial application layer protocol used for communication between industrial control
systems and their components, to: such as programmable automation controllers, programmable logic
controlleror an I/O system. The "IP" in EtherNet / IP is not an abbreviation for "Internet Protocol" but
instead stands for "Industrial Protocol".

quote from en.wikipedia.org

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 300
The EtherNet / IP on AC500

The EtherNet / IP on an AC500.

Item

1 Network Status LED

2 Module Status LED

3 Link / Activity

4 Ethernet Interface

LED of network status.


Note: a sequence of LED lighting is made at the module ignition

LED State Description


Off No power or no IP address
Green On-line, one or more connections established (CIP Class 1 or 3)
Green, flashing On-line, no connections established
Red Duplicate IP address, FATAL error
Red, flashing One or more connections timed out (CIP Class 1 or 3)

LED of module status.


Note: a sequence of the LEDs is made of the power module.

LED State Description


Off No power
Green Controlled by a Scanner in Run state
Green, flashing No Scanner or configured in Idle state
Red Major fault (EXCEPTION-state, FATAL error, etc ...)
Red, flashing Recoverable fault (s)

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 301
LED Link / Activity
LED State Description
Off Link, no activity
Green Link established
Green, flickering Activity

EtherNet / IP configuration

Before starting using the communication module EtherNet / IP on the control unit, please ensure to have
completed all the steps required to configure it correctly.

First it will be necessary to access to the environment of the auxiliary functions:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 302
Access to the environment of the system configuration from the menu of the auxiliary functions.

Once entered the environment of the system configuration, press the button of AC500STORE to access the
environment that will allow to purchase the function of Fieldbus protocols management :

Select Fieldbus to decide to unlock the management of Fieldbus protocols, and press the button on the
right:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 303
In the screen that will be displayed it will be required to send the code indicated to the controller supplier.
Once made, it will be given the code to be entered to proceed with the purchase of the function.

After entering the unlock code, press the ENTER button. If the code is correct it will be displayed the
confirmation that the operation has been completed successfully.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 304
At this point it will be possible to go to the configuration environment of general data, contained in the
environment of the system settings, and enable the parameter Fieldbus management.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 305
Once enabled the management of the Fieldbus protocols, it will be possible to access to the configuration
environment:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 306
In this environment it will be possible to check if the module has been properly connected and enter the
data needed to configure it in the right way:

While proceeding with the configuration data entry of the module, it is necessary to keep in mind following
things:

• If the serial number and firmware version are set to 0 (zero) and the module is unknown, it means
that the AC500 driver failed in recognizing the Fieldbus module; in this case it is necessary to
restart the controller and check that the connections of the module have been made in the correct
way.

• Do not set an IP address already set to the Ethernet port on the controller.

After completing the configurations of the data module, it will be asked to restart the controller to
complete the initialization procedure.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 307
EXTENDED PROTOCOL – COMMANDS DESCRIPTION

Command Description

Command Description
Type 1 Command to overwrite the content of a single field
with the data contained in the packet transmitted.
In the command the field number to modify is in
the format: nn (01,02,...,99).

NOTE: An advanced version of this command, not


managed by AC500 , allows to receive from the
controller the content of a specific field of the
program actually loaded.
Type G Command to communicate to the controller to start
a cycle.
Type I Command to receive the output system state
(DONE, READY and PAUSE outputs).
Type O Command to communicate to the controller to get
in the online state .
Type P Command to communicate the loading of a
program with same name of the one contained in
the packet.

NOTE: An advanced version of this command, not


managed by AC500 , allows to receive the name of
the program actually loaded on the controller.
Type Q Command to modify a query text present on the
controller. In the command the query number to
modify is in the format: nn (01,02,...,99).
Type S Command to receive the errors state of the
controller. A series of codes indicate the type of
error occured.
Type V Command that allows to modify the content of a
variable field. In the command the field number to
modify is in the format: nn (01,02,...,99).

NOTE: An advanced version of the command, not


present on AC500, allows to modify more variable
fields using a single command. Further it is possible
to receive the content of a variable field.
Type H Command to change the height of a text field or of
a an arc text field. In the command is the number
of the field to be changed in the format nn (01,02,
..., 99).

This type of command is only available by unlocking


the advanced protocols management from AC500
Store.
Type C Command to change the position of a text field or
of an arc text field. In the command is the number
of the field to be changed in the format nn (01,02,

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 308
..., 99).

The two different values to be set for the X and Y


coordinates must be separated in this string by the
character ';'.

This type of command is only available by unlocking


the advanced protocols management from AC500
Store.
Type D Command to change the diameter of an arc text
field. In the command is the number of the field to
be changed in the format nn (01,02, ..., 99).

This type of command is only available by unlocking


the advanced protocols management from AC500
Store.
Type B Command to change the starting angle of an arc
text field. In the command is the number of the
field to be changed in the format nn (01,02, ..., 99).
The value is in degrees.

This type of command is only available by unlocking


the advanced protocols management from AC500
Store.

ETHERNET / IP Adis Object (A2h)

This object is used for the management of data that must be passed to the application AC500. The CIP
Object ADIS (Application Data Instances, mapped at address 0xA2) is used as through for the data exchange
with the application AC500. To each instance corresponds a different command of the extended protocol.
Each instance is formed by several properties, called attributes.

# Name Access Type Description


1 Name Get Array of CHAR Parameter name
2 Data type Get UINT8 Data type of instance value
3 No. of elements Get UINT8 Number of elements of the specified data type
4 Description Get UINT8 Bit field describing the access rights for this instance
Bit: Meaning:
Set = 0 Get Access
1 Set = Set Access
5 Value Get / Set Determined by Instance value.
6 Max value Get attribute # 2 The maximum permitted parameter value (NOT
USED)
7 Min value Get The minimum permitted value parameter. (NOT
USED)
8 Default value Get The default parameter value. (NOT USED)

To set or read each value of the command associated with each instance (see table of the object dictionary)
refer to the value attribute, or the attribute number 5.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 309
ETHERNET / IP Get / Set Attribute Single

The controls data access, both in reading and in writing, used with the model EtherNet / IP of
AC500 are two:

• Get Attribute Single (0x0E): command for the reading of an attribute of an instance;

• Set Attribute Single (0x10): command for the writing an attribute of an instance.

The model EtherNet / IP set to AC500 handles only these two commands for the operations of
access to resources, this means that all other commands are not currently managed and are not
recommended for use.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 310
OBJECT DICTIONARY - ETHERNET IP
CIP Object Instance Object Type Descrizione Rights
Information request about the
0xA2 1 Type I UINT16 R
status of the outputs.
Information request about the
status of the errors. In the first
0xA2 2 Type S UINT16 register it will be located the R
upper part of the WORD, in the
second one the lower part
Online status setting.

The setting to value =1 of the


least significative bit will
command the online status.
0xA2 3 Type O UINT8 W
All the other past values will be
ignored.

Example: 01h (system online)


Marking cycle Start setting.

The setting to value=1 of the least


significative bit will launch the
cycle start.
0xA2 4 Type G UINT8 W
All the other past values will be
ignored.

Example: 01h (system online)


Instance dedicated to Type 1
command.

This instance allows the reading


Array of
0xA2 5 Type 1 and writing operations on R/W
CHAR
program fields.

Max size of the string is 255


characters.
Instance dedicated to Type V
command.

This instance allows the reading


Array of and writing operations on the
0xA2 6 Type V R/W
CHAR variable fields of the program.

Max size of the string is


characters.
Array of Instance dedicated to Type P
0xA2 7 Type P R/W
CHAR command.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 311
This instance allows the
operations of reading and loading
of the working program.
Reading will allow to ask for the
name of the program loaded on
the controller, writing a value it
will be possible to load that
program.

Max size of the string is 255


characters.
Instance dedicated to Type Q
command.

This instance allows the writing


Array of
0xA2 8 Type Q operations on a query of the W
CHAR
controller.

Max size of the string is 255


characters.
Instance dedicated to the number
of the field to take note of when
reading / writing operations will
be done on instance 5.
0xA2 9 Type 1 FIELD UINT8 W
The value which is set will be
used to specify the number of the
field that will be read / modified
using instance 5.
Instance dedicated to the
number of the field to take note
of when reading / writing
operations will be done on
instance 6.
0xA2 10 Type V FIELD UINT8 W
The value which is set will be
used to specify the number of the
field that will be read / modified
using instance 6.
Instance dedicated to the
number of the field to take note
of when reading / writing
operations will be done on
instance 8.
0xA2 11 Type Q FIELD UINT8 W
The value which is set will be
used to specify the number of the
field that will be modified using
instance 8.
Instance dedicated to the type of
Array of
0xA2 12 Type H command Type H. R/W
CHAR

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 312
This instance allows reading and
writing operations on the value of
the width of a text field or arc text
type

This data will contain the height


value in text string format. This
means that if the current height
value is 4, the value of this data
will be the string "4".

The maximum size of the string


passed is 255 characters.

This type of command is only


available by unlocking the
advanced protocols management
from AC500 Store.
Instance dedicated to the field
numbers to take into
consideration when reading /
writing operations will be
performed on instance 12.

The value set here will be used to


0xA2 13 Type H FIELD UINT8 specify the number of the field W
that will be read / changed with
the instance 12.

This type of command is only


available by unlocking the
advanced protocols management
from AC500 Store.
Instance dedicated to type of
command C.

This instance allows to perform


reading and writing operations on
the position of a text field or arc
text field.

This data will contain the position


values in the text string format.
Array of
0xA2 14 Type C The values of the XY position in R/W
CHAR
the string will be separated by ';'.
This means that if the value of the
current position is x = 10 and y =
20, the value of this data will be
the string "10; 20".

The maximum size of the string


passed is 255 characters.

This type of command is only

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 313
available by unlocking the
advanced protocols management
from AC500 Store.
Instance dedicated to the field
numbers to take into
consideration when reading /
writing operations will be
performed on instance 14.

The value set here will be used to


0xA2 15 Type C FIELD UINT8 specify the number of the field W
that will be read / changed with
the instance 14.

This type of command is only


available by unlocking the
advanced protocols management
from AC500 Store.
Instance dedicated to type of
command D.

This instance allows to perform


reading and writing operations on
the diameter of an arc of a field of
arc text type.

This data will contain the position


values in the text string format.
The values of the XY position in
Array of
0xA2 16 Type D the string will be separated by ';'. R/W
CHAR
This means that if the value of the
current diameter is 30, the value
of this data will be the string "30”

The maximum size of the string


passed is 255 characters.

This type of command is only


available by unlocking the
advanced protocols management
from AC500 Store.
Instance dedicated to the field
numbers to take into
consideration when reading /
writing operations will be
performed on instance 16.

0xA2 17 Type D FIELD UINT8 The value set here will be used to W
specify the number of the field
that will be read / changed with
the instance 16.

This type of command is only


available by unlocking the

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 314
advanced protocols management
from AC500 Store.
Instance dedicated to type of
command B.

This instance allows to perform


reading and writing operations on
the start angle of a field of arc
text type.The arc of the field must
be created in degrees mode.

This data will contain the value of


the start angle of the arc in the
Array of text string format. This means
0xA2 18 Type B R/W
CHAR that if the current value of the
start angle is 90, the value of this
data will be the string "90” . The
value is in degrees

The maximum size of the string


passed is 255 characters.

This type of command is only


available by unlocking the
advanced protocols management
from AC500 Store.
Instance dedicated to the field
numbers to take into
consideration when reading /
writing operations will be
performed on instance 18.

The value set here will be used to


0xA2 19 Type B FIELD UINT8 specify the number of the field W
that will be read / changed with
the instance 18.

This type of command is only


available by unlocking the
advanced protocols management
from AC500 Store.

EtherNet / IP connected all'AC500

Once the control unit is configured correctly it is possible to use the object dictionary above to perform all
the queries offered by the AC500 software . It is possible to connect to the EtherNet / IP module placed on
the AC500 controller using a standard Ethernet cable.

Example READING Field

1. Writing the number of the field to read in instance 9.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 315
2. Reading of instance 5.

Array Index: 0 1 2 3
ASCII Value(Hex): 54 45 53 54
String: T E S T

Example WRITING Field

1. Writing the number of the field to write in instance 9.


2. Writing instance 5 with following values.

Array Index : 0 1 2 3 4
ASCII Value(Hex): 54 45 53 54 31
String: T E S T 1

EtherNet/IP implicit modeI

Reading area
Instance Object Type Description
1 Type I UINT16 Information on the status of the outputs
Information on the status of the errors. This register contains
2 Type S UINT16 system errors until the PIX_OUT_OF_RANGE_ERROR, see AC500
manual for more details.
3 Read Cmd Type UINT16 It indicates the current status of the type of command in reading.
It indicates the field or the query index in reading. Used only for the
4 Read Id UINT16
commands of type FIELD, VARIABLE and QUERY.
It indicates the information about the status of the string in reading.
5 Read Flags UINT16 In particular, it indicates the status (0 = not ready, 1 = ready ) of the
string in reading.
Array of 6 bytes free for future use
6 Unused
UINT8 [6]
It indicates the content of the string in reading. Combined with the
Array of
7 Read String flag it is possible to read the number of byte corresponding to the
UINT8 [64]
string to be read.

Representation:

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

01-02 : Status of the outputs (Type I)

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 316
03-04 : Status of the information (Type S)
05-06 : READ-CMD current type
07-08: READ current ID
09-10: READ-String Flags
11-16: Unused
17-80: Read String data

Writing area
Instance Object Type Description
1 Read Cmd Type UINT16 It sets the type of command to use for the operations in reading.
It sets the index of the field or of the query to use for the
2 Read Id UINT16 operations in reading. Used only for the commands of type FIELD,
VARIABLE and QUERY.
Setting of the system online. To perform the command it is
3 Type O UINT8
necessary to set this BYTE to value 1.
Setting of the marking start. To perform the command it is
4 Type G UINT8
necessary to set this BYTE to value 1.
5 Write Cmd Type UINT16 It sets the type of command to use for the operations in writing.
It sets the index of the field or of the query to use for the operations
6 Write Id UINT16 in writing. Used only for the commands of type FIELD, VARIABLE
and QUERY.
It sets the status information of the string in writing. In particular, it
7 Write Flags UINT16 indicates the status (0 = not ready, 1 = ready ) of the string in
writing.
Array of 4 bytes free for future use.
8 Unused
UINT8 [8]
It sets the content of the string in writing. Combined with the flag it
Array of
9 Write String is possible to write the number of byte corresponding to the string
UINT8 [64]
to write.

Representation:

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

01-02: Set READ-CMD Type


03-04: Set READ ID
05: Set online
06: Set start of a cycle
07-08 : Set WRITE-CMD Type
09-10 : Set WRITE ID

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 317
11-12 : Set WRITE-String Flag
13-16: unused

STRINGS MANAGEMENT:

Following is the description of the strings logic management using the I / O data of the Fieldbus protocols.
Through some simple map of bytes it is possible to configure dynamically the operations in reading and
writing on types of string data. The bytes implemented for the management of the strings allow to define
the type of string on which to operate ( program name, field of a program, query, etc..), the id of the field
that may be required and the flag to indicate the status of the operation and the length of the string set.

- COMMAND Type
This data identifies the type of string to use in the reading/writing operation.

0) NULL = No string
1) PATTERN = String referred to the programs
2) TEXT = String referred to the fields of a program
3) VARIABLE = String referred to the variable fields of a program
4) QUERY = String referred to the query
5) TEXT HEIGHT = String referred to the numeric value of the text height
6) TEXT POSITION = String referred to the numeric value of the XY values of the text position (the two
values must be separeted by ';' char)
7) ARC TEXT DIAMETER = String referred to the numeric value of the diameter of an arc text
8) ARC TEXT START ANGLE = String referred to the numeric value of the start angle (degrees) of an arc
text

- ID
Optional data, to be used only in the types of command TEXT, VARIABLE, QUERY, VARIABLE, TEXT HEIGHT,
TEXT POSITION, ARC TEXT DIAMETER and ARC TEXT START ANGLE and identifies the number of the field on
which to perform the reading / writing operation.

- String Flags
These data are used to identify the information relating to the string in reading / writing. Through the first
byte in fact it will be able to communicate if the string is ready to be read / written or not, through the
second byte it will be possible to define the length of the string present in the data area.

Example:

In the writing area some bytes are used to define what the PLC wants to read from AC500. By setting
these data the bytes of the reading area will be modified on the basis of the configuration set in the writing
area.

For example, supposing to read the program currently loaded on AC500, it will be necessary to write the
bytes related to the configuration of the reading string as follows:

WRITE AREA
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

AC500 will modify the bytes in the reading area as follows:

READ AREA

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 318
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
00 00 01 00 01 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
84 69 83 84
(T) (E) (S) (T)

Supposing to read the third field of a program:

WRITE AREA
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
02 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

AC500 will modify the bytes in the reading area as follows:

READ AREA
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
00 00 02 03 01 09 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
84 69 83 84 70 73 69 76 68
(T) (E) (X) (T) (F) (I) (E) (L) (D)

Conversely, in case of loading a program into AC500, it will be necessary to configure the writing area as
follows:

WRITE AREA
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
00 00 00 00 01 00 01 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
65 67 53 48 48 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
(A) (C) (5) (0) (0)

Attention : AC500 will perform the operation on the string only when the status flag of the Write Flags
instance (eleventh byte of the representation) will be set to 1.

WARNING: starting from the software versions following to 2.3.0 (included) the management of
configuration of cyclical data has been modified.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 319
EDITING FIELDS

The protocols handled by the AC500 can also be used to edit the field's format presented in a marking
program. This can be done using TYPE H, TYPE C, TYPE D and TYPE B commands.

All this commands work using string format to communicate the numeric values of each editing function. In
this short chapter there are some examples to follow if you want to edit the field's format.

Warning: the editing fields command can be used only if the "ADVANCED EXTENDED PROTOCOL /
FIELDBUS" function is unlocked in the AC500 STORE.

Read the TEXT HEIGHT


• set the number of field that you want to edit (take a look at the specific protocol that you're using);
• read the datas referred to the TYPE H command;
• this data are a string that contains the numeric value of the text height, for example:
"4" means that the text it's 4mm or 4 point TTF height

Write the TEXT HEIGHT


• set the number of field that you want to edit (take a look at the specific protocol that you're using);
• write the datas referred to the TYPE H command;
• this data are a string that contains the numeric value of the text height, for example:
"6" means that the text will change to 6 mm or 6 point TTF height

Read the TEXT POSITION


• set the number of field that you want to edit (take a look at the specific protocol that you're using);
• read the datas referred to the TYPE C command;
• this data are a string that contains the numeric values of the text XY position separated by ";", for
example:
"20;15.5" means that the text position it's X=20mm and Y=15.5mm

Write the TEXT POSITION


• set the number of field that you want to edit (take a look at the specific protocol that you're using);
• write the datas referred to the TYPE C command;
• this data are a string that contains the numeric values of the text XY position separated by ";", for
example:
"40;10" means that the text position will change to X=40mm and Y=10mm

Read the ARC TEXT DIAMETER


• set the number of field that you want to edit (take a look at the specific protocol that you're using);
• read the datas referred to the TYPE D command;
• this data are a string that contains the numeric value of the arc text diameter, for example:
"30.6" means that the arc text diameter is 30.6mm

Write the ARC TEXT DIAMETER


• set the number of field that you want to edit (take a look at the specific protocol that you're using);
• write the datas referred to the TYPE D command;
• this data are a string that contains the numeric value of arc text diameter, for example:
"40" means that the arc text diameter will change to 40mm

Read the ARC TEXT START ANGLE

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 320
• set the number of field that you want to edit (take a look at the specific protocol that you're using);
• read the datas referred to the TYPE B command;
• this data are a string that contains the numeric value of the arc text start angle, for example:
"180.7" means that the arc text start angle is 180.7°

Write the ARC TEXT START ANGLE


• set the number of field that you want to edit (take a look at the specific protocol that you're using);
• write the datas referred to the TYPE D command;
• this data are a string that contains the numeric value of arc text start angle, for example:
"90" means that the arc text start angle will change to 90°

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 321
Appendix H
Fieldbus Profibus module

Profibus

PROFIBUS(Process Field Bus) is a standard for fieldbus communication in automationtechnology and was
first promoted in 1989 byBMBF(German department of education and research) and then used bySiemens.
It Should not be confused with the PROFINET standard for Industrial Ethernet. PROFIBUS is not an openly
published and royalty-free protocol as older ones like MODBUS.

quote from en.wikipedia.org

Profibus port on AC500

The Profibus port on an AC500.

Item

1 Operation Mode

2 Status

3 Profibus Connector

Operation Mode.

State Indication Comments


Off Not online / No power -
Green Data exchange -
Flashing Green Clear -
Flashing Red (1 flash) Parametrization error Error while configuring the device.
Flashing Red (2 flashes) PROFIBUS Configuration error CONFIGURATION error between MASTER /
SLAVE Profibus devices.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 322
Status.

State Indication Comments


Off Not initialized Anybus state = 'SETUP is' or 'NW_INIT'
Green Initialized Anybus module has left the 'NW_INIT' were
Flashing Green Initialized, diagnostic event (s) present Extended diagnostic bit is September
Red Exception error Anybus state = 'EXCEPTION'

Profibus Connector (DB9F)

Pin Signal Description


1 - -
2 - -
3 B Line Positive RxD / TxD, RS485 level
4 RTS Request to send
5 GND Bus ground (isolated)
6 +5 V Bus Output +5 V power termination (isolated, short-
circuit protected)
7 - -
8 A Line Negative RxD / TxD, RS485 level
9 - -
Housing Cable Shield Internally connected to the protective earth
via Anybus cable shield
According to the PROFIBUS standard filters.

Configuring the Profibus

Before starting using the Profibus communication module, please ensure to have completed all the steps
required to configure it correctly.

First it will be necessary to enter the environment of the auxiliary functions:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 323
Access to the environment of the system configuration menu of the auxiliary functions.

Once entered the system configuration environment, press the button of AC500 Store to enter the
environment allowing the purchase the functions of Fieldbus protocols management:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 324
Select Fieldbus to decide to unlock the management of the Fieldbus protocols, and press the button on the
right:

In the screen that will be displayed, it will be required to send the code to the controller supplier. Once
made, it will be informed the code to be entered to proceed with the purchase of the function.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 325
After entering the unlock code, press the ENTER button. If the code is correct it will be displayed the
confirmation that the operation had been completed successfully.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 326
Now it will be possible to enter the configuration environment of general data, contained in the
environment of the system settings, and enable the parameter Fieldbus Management

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 327
Once enabled the management of the Fieldbus protocols it will be possible to enter the configuration
environment:

In this environment it will be possible to verify if the module is connected properly and enter the data
needed to configure it correctly:

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 328
While proceeding with the data entry of the module configuration, it is necessary to keep in mind the
following things:

• If the serial number and firmware version are set to 0 (zero) and the module is unknown it means
that the driver of AC500 failed in recognizing the module Fieldbus, in this case it is necessary to
restart the controller and check that the connections of the module have been made in the correct
way.

After completing the data configurations of the module it will be requested to restart the controller to
complete the initialization procedure.

EXTENDED PROTOCOL - DESCRIPTION OF COMMANDS

Command Description
Type 1 Command to overwrite the contents of a single field
with the data contained in the transmitted packet.
In the command is the number of the field to be
modified in the format nn (01,02, ..., 99).

In reading mode command allows you to receive


from the controller to the contents of a specific
field of the currently loaded program.
Type G Command to communicate with the controller to
start a cycle.
Type I Command to receive the output states of the
system (outputs DONE, READY and PAUSE).
Type O Command to communicate to the unit to get in the
online state.
Type P Command to communicate to load a program with
the same name as that contained in the package.

In reading mode command allows you to receive


the name of the program currently loaded on the
controller.
Type Q This command allows you to change the text of a
query on this unit. In the command is the number
of the query to change the format nn (01,02, ..., 99).
Type S Command to get the status of the controller errors.
There are a series of codes that indicate the type of
error that occurred.
Type V This command allows to change the content of a
variable field. In the command is the number of the
field to be modified in the format nn (01,02, ..., 99).

In reading mode command allows you to receive


the contents of a variable field.
Type H Command to modify the height of a text or an arc
text field. In the command the field number to
modify is in the format: nn (01,02,...,99).

This type of command is only available by unlocking


the advanced protocols management from AC500

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 329
Store.
Type C Command to modify the position of a text or an arc
text field. In the command the field number to
modify is in the format: nn (01,02,...,99).

The two different values for X and Y coordinates


must be separated from a ';' character.

This type of command is only available by unlocking


the advanced protocols management from AC500
Store.

Type D Command to modify the diameter of an arc text


field. In the command the field number to modify is
in the format: nn (01,02,...,99).

This type of command is only available by unlocking


the advanced protocols management from AC500
Store.
Type B Command to modify the start angle of an arc text
field. In the command the field number to modify is
in the format: nn (01,02,...,99).

This type of command is only available by unlocking


the advanced protocols management from AC500
Store.

Necessary GSD File : HMSB1811.gsd

Cyclic Data
Cyclic data are needed in the Profibus communication and therefore it has been implemented a record of
one BYTE in reading on driver side. This means that to configure the system, the master must have
configured an OUTPUT module of one BYTE. The consistency of the configurations side Slave – Master is
crucial and it is necessary they correspond as described above.

Acyclic Data
The following is the calculation required to map the ADI (Application Data Instances, used for the
executions of the remote control functionalities of the controller) with acyclic requests that must be
initiated by the Profibus master:

ADI = slot • 255 + index + 1


slot = (ADI - 1) / 255
index = (ADI - 1) MOD 255

Examples :
ADI Slot Index
1 0 0
255 0 254
65025 254 254

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 330
ADI Object Type Descriptions Rights
Information request about the status of
0x01 Type I BYTE R
the outputs.
Information request about the status of
0x02 Type S WORD R
the errors.
System online status setting.

0x03 Type O BYTE The online procedure of the system will W


start when writing the register with value
1
Marking cycle Start setting

0x04 Type G BYTE The procedure of marking cycle start will W


start when writing the register with value
1
Type 1 Field Number of the field to modify or to read.
0x05 WORD W
number
Type V Field Number of the field to modify or to read.
0x06 WORD W
number
Type Q Field Number of the query to modify
0x07 WORD W
number
Value of the field to modify or to read.
Each register will contain two ASCII
characters. In writing, if the character 0
0x10-0x42 Type 1 String WORD will be found, the value analysis will be R/W
terminated. In reading a 0 character will
be put at the end of the string .
This parameter, set to 0 by default, is
used to "expand" the number of
0x43 Type 1 Pag WORD W
characters of the string of the previous
command.
Value of the field to modify.
Each register will contain two ASCII
characters. In writing, if the character 0
0x45-0x77 Type V String WORD R/W
will be found, the value analysis will be
terminated. In reading a 0 character will
be put at the end of the string .
This parameter, set to 0 by default, is
used to "expand" the number of
0x78 Type V Pag WORD W
characters of the string of the previous
command.
Value of the query to modify. In writing, if
0x7A-0xAC Type Q String WORD the character 0 will be found, the value W
analysis will be terminated.
This parameter, set to 0 by default, is
used to "expand" the number of
0xAD Type Q Pag WORD W
characters of the string of the previous
command.
Value of the program to load.
0xAF-0xE1 Type P String WORD R/W
In writing, if the character 0 will be

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 331
found, the value analysis will be
terminated. In reading a 0 character will
be put at the end of the string .
This parameter, set to 0 by default, is
used to "expand" the number of
0xE2 Type P Pag WORD W
characters of the string of the previous
command.
Number of the field to modify or to read.

Type H Field
0xE4 WORD W
number This type of command is only available by
unlocking the advanced protocols
management from AC500 Store.
Value of the height to modify or to read.
This data can be used only in a text or arc
text field. Each register will contain two
ASCII characters. In writing, if the
character 0 will be found, the value
analysis will be terminated. In reading a 0
character will be put at the end of the
string .
0xE5-0xEF Type H String WORD R/W
This data will contains the value in string
format. So if the value is 4 this data will
contain the string "4".

This type of command is only available by


unlocking the advanced protocols
management from AC500 Store.

Number of the field to modify or to read.

Type C Field
0xF1 WORD W
number This type of command is only available by
unlocking the advanced protocols
management from AC500 Store.
Value of the position to modify or to
read. This data can be used only in a text
or arc text field. Each register will
contain two ASCII characters. In writing,
if the character 0 will be found, the value
analysis will be terminated. In reading a 0
character will be put at the end of the
string .
0xF2-0xFC Type C String WORD R/W
This data will contains the value in string
format. So if the value is x=20 y=10 this
data will contain the string "20;10".

This type of command is only available by


unlocking the advanced protocols
management from AC500 Store.
0xFE Type D Field WORD Number of the field to modify or to read. W

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 332
number

This type of command is only available by


unlocking the advanced protocols
management from AC500 Store.
Value of the diameter to modify or to
read. This data can be used only in an
arc text field. Each register will contain
two ASCII characters. In writing, if the
character 0 will be found, the value
analysis will be terminated. In reading a 0
character will be put at the end of the
string .
0xFF-0x109 Type D String WORD R/W
This data will contains the value in string
format. So if the value is 30 this data will
contain the string "30".

This type of command is only available by


unlocking the advanced protocols
management from AC500 Store.
Number of the field to modify or to read.
Type B Field
0x10B WORD This type of command is only available W
number
by unlocking the advanced protocols
management from AC500 Store.
Value of the start angle to modify or to
read. This data can be used only in an arc
text field. Each register will contain two
ASCII characters. In writing, if the
character 0 will be found, the value
analysis will be terminated. In reading a 0
character will be put at the end of the
string .
0x10C-0x116 Type B String WORD R/W
This data will contains the value in string
format. So if the value is 90 this data will
contain the string "90".

This type of command is only available by


unlocking the advanced protocols
management from AC500 Store.

Example READING Field

1. Writing of the number of the field to read in register 0x05.


2. Reading of the registers 0x10-0x42.

Register: 0x10 0x11 0x12


ASCII Value (Hex): 54 45 53 54 00 00
String: T E S T /0 /0

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 333
Example WRITING Field

1. Writing of the number of the field to read in register 0x05.


2. Reading of the registers 0x10-0x42.

Register: 0x10 0x11 0x12


ASCII Value (Hex): 54 45 53 54 31 00
String: T E S T 1 /0

Strings handling

For managing data strings sending , 50 registers dedicated as WORD type. Since a WORD contains two
characters and 50 registers are available for the strings , there is a total of 100 characters in reading /
writing of a string. In order to extend the number of characters of a string, it has been made available a
page handling system , where the first 100 characters correspond to the first page, the next 100 to the
second page, and so on.
As an example, we have :
- Page register set to 0 (default) = 50 registers operate on the first 100 characters of the string;
- Page register set to 1 = 50 registers operate from the 100 to 200 of the string

Profibus - EtherNet/IP implicit modeI (backward compatibility AC500 ver. 2.1.0 - 2.2.1)

Reading area
Instance Object Type Description
1 Type I UINT16 Information on the status of the outputs
2 Type S UINT16 Information on the status of the errors
3 Read Cmd Type UINT16 It indicates the current status of the type of command in reading.
It indicates the field or the query index in reading. Used only for the
4 Read Id UINT16
commands of type FIELD, VARIABLE and QUERY.
It indicates the information about the status of the string in reading.
5 Read Flags UINT16 The first byte indicates the status (0 = not ready, 1 = ready ) while
the second byte indicates the length of the string in reading.
Array of 6 bytes free for future use
6 Unused
UINT8 [6]
It indicates the content of the string in reading. Combined with the
Array of
7 Read String flag it is possible to read the number of byte corresponding to the
UINT8 [64]
string to be read.

Representation:

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 334
65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

01-02: Status of the outputs (Type I)


03-04: Status of the information (Type S)
05-06: READ-CMD current type
07-08: READ current ID
09-10: READ-String Flags.
11-16: Unused
17-80: Read String data

Writing area
Instance Object Type Description
It sets the type of command to use for the operations in
1 Read Cmd Type UINT16
reading.
It sets the index of the field or of the query to use for the
2 Read Id UINT16 operations in reading. Used only for the commands of type
FIELD, VARIABLE and QUERY.
Setting of the system online. To perform the command it is
3 Type O UINT8
necessary to set this BYTE to value 1.
Setting of the marking start. To perform the command it is
4 Type G UINT8
necessary to set this BYTE to value 1.
It sets the type of command to use for the operations in
5 Write Cmd Type UINT16
writing.
It sets the index of the field or of the query to use for the
6 Write Id UINT16 operations in writing. Used only for the commands of type
FIELD, VARIABLE and QUERY.
It sets the status information of the string in writing. The first
7 Write Flags UINT16 byte indicates the status (0 = not ready , 1 = ready) while the
second byte indicates the length of the string in writing.
Array of 4 bytes free for future use.
8 Unused
UINT8 [4]
It sets the content of the string in writing. Combined with the
Array of
9 Write String flag it is possible to write the number of byte corresponding to
UINT8 [64]
the string to write.

Representation:

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 335
01-02: Set READ-CMD Type
03-04: Set READ ID
05: Set online
06: Set start of a cycle
07-08: Set WRITE-CMD Type
09-10: Set WRITE ID
11-12: Set WRITE-String Flags.
13-16: Unused
17-80: Write String data

String Management Example:

In the writing area some bytes are used to define what the PLC wants to read from AC500. By setting
these data the bytes of the reading area will be modified on the basis of the configuration set in the writing
area.

For example, supposing to read the program currently loaded on AC500, it will be necessary to write the
bytes related to the configuration of the reading string as follows:

WRITE AREA
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

AC500 will modify the bytes in the reading area as follows:

READ AREA
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 04

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
84 69 83 84
(T) (E) (S) (T)

Supposing to read the third field of a program:

WRITE AREA
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
00 02 00 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

AC500 will modify the bytes in the reading area as follows:

READ AREA
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
00 00 00 00 00 02 00 03 00 09

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
84 69 83 84 70 73 69 76 68
(T) (E) (X) (T) (F) (I) (E) (L) (D)

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 336
Conversely, in case of loading a program into AC500, it will be necessary to configure the
writing area as follows:

WRITE AREA
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 01 05 00 00 00 00

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
65 67 53 48 48 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
(A) (C) (5) (0) (0)

Attention : AC500 will perform the operation on the string only when the status flag of the Write
Flags instance (eleventh byte of the representation) will be set to 1.

WARNING: starting from the software versions following to 2.1.0 (included) the management of
configuration of cyclical data has been modified.

Automator (Suisse) Sagl Manual AC500 Controller ∼Rev 14 – February 2016 pag - 337

You might also like